USER’S MANUAL

LogBook/300 & /360

Stand-alone, Intelligent PC-Based
Data Acquisition Systems

LogBook/300 & 360
p/n 461-0901 rev 7.0*372180C-01*
372180C-01

Measurement Computing
10 Commerce Way
Norton, MA 02766(508) 946-5100
Fax: (508) 946-9500
info@mccdaq.com

www.mccdaq.com

This page is intentionally blank.

Warranty Information

Contact Measurement Computing by phone, fax, or e-mail in regard to warranty-related issues:
Phone: (508) 946-5100, fax: (508) 946-9500, e-mail: info@mccdaq.com

Limitation of Liability

Measurement Computing cannot be held liable for any damages resulting from the use or misuse of this product.

Copyright, Trademark, and Licensing Notice

All Measurement Computing documentation, software, and hardware are copyright with all rights reserved. No part ofthis product may be copied, reproduced or transmitted by any mechanical, photographic, electronic, or other method
without Measurement Computing’s prior written consent. IOtech product names are trademarked; other product names, asapplicable, are trademarks of their respective holders. All supplied IOtech software (including miscellaneous support
files, drivers, and sample programs) may only be used on one installation. You may make archival backup copies.

CE Notice

Many Measurement Computing products carry the CE marker indicating they comply with the safety and emissions
standards of the European Community. When applicable these products have a Declaration of Conformity stating which
specifications and operating conditions apply. You can view the Declarations of Conformity at
www.mccdaq.com/legal.aspx (CE Information page).

Warnings, Cautions, Notes, and Tips

Refer all service to qualified personnel. This caution symbol warns of possible personal injury or equipment damage
under noted conditions. Follow all safety standards of professional practice and the recommendations in this manual.
Using this equipment in ways other than described in this manual can present serious safety hazards or cause equipment
damage.
This warning symbol is used in this manual or on the equipment to warn of possible injury or death from electricalshock under noted conditions.

This ESD caution symbol urges proper handling of equipment or components sensitive to damage from electrostatic
discharge. Proper handling guidelines include the use of grounded anti-static mats and wrist straps, ESD-protective bags
and cartons, and related procedures.

This symbol indicates the message is important, but is not of a Warning or Caution category. These notes can be of great
benefit to the user, and should be read.
In this manual, the book symbol always precedes the words “Reference Note.” This type of note identifies the locationof additional information that may prove helpful. References may be made to other chapters or other documentation.
Tips provide advice that may save time during a procedure, or help to clarify an issue. Tips may include additionalreference.

Specifications and Calibration
Specifications are subject to change without notice. Significant changes will be addressed in an addendum or revision to
the manual. As applicable, the hardware is calibrated to published specifications. Periodic hardware calibration is notcovered under the warranty and must be performed by qualified personnel as specified in this manual. Improper
calibration procedures may void the warranty.

CAUTION
Using this equipment in ways other than described in this manual can cause
personal injury or equipment damage. Before setting up and using yourequipment, you should read all documentation that covers your system.
Pay special attention to Warnings and Cautions.

Note:

During software installation, Adobe® PDF versions of user manuals will automaticallyinstall onto your hard drive as a part of product support. The default location is in the
Programs group, which can be accessed from the Windows Desktop. Initialnavigation is as follows:
Start [Desktop “Start” pull-down menu]⇒ Programs⇒ IOtech LogBook Software
You can also access the PDF documents directly from the data acquisition CD by using
the <View PDFs> button located on the opening screen.
Refer to the PDF documentation for details regarding both hardware and software.
A copy of the Adobe Acrobat Reader® is included on your CD. The Reader provides
a means of reading and printing the PDF documents. Note that hardcopy versions of
the manuals can be ordered from the factory.

Your order was carefully inspected prior to shipment. When you receive your system, carefully
unpack all items from the shipping carton and check for physical signs of damage that may haveoccurred during shipment. Promptly report any damage to the shipping agent and your sales
representative. Retain all shipping materials in case the unit needs returned to the factory.

iv

929196

LogBook User’s ManualManual Layout
Chapter 1 – An Introduction to LogBook discusses LogBook basics and highlights operational features.
The last part of the chapter contains product specifications.
QS300– LogBook/300 Quick Start Guide (Includes Installation Procedure)

QS360– LogBook/360 Quick Start Guide (Includes Installation Procedure)

Chapter 4 – System Expansion discusses the expansion of LogBook systems in regard to LBK andDBK options. Power considerations and pinouts for P1, P2, and P3 DB37 connectors are also
included.
DBK Basics – discusses option cards and modules (DBKs) that can be used to enhance and expand dataacquisition systems. Note that DBK Basics is not a chapter, but an independent document that is
applicable to this user’s manual, as well as others.
Chapter 5 – LBK and other non-DBK Options discusses the RS-422/485 Communications Card,
memory expansion, remote LogBook Terminal, four-channel Digital-to-Analog Output card, andthree options regarding a remote on/off switch and LED indicator.
Chapter 6 – GPS and Serial Device Data Collection discusses the LogBook/360 support for the Global
Positioning System (GPS).
Chapter 7 – Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler provides instruction for communicating withremote LogBooks via modem. The chapter also discusses the independent Upload Scheduler
application which can be used to configure events to initiate data uploads for one or more LogBooks.
Chapter 8 - CE Compliance pertains to CE standards and conditions relevant to LogBook systems.
LogView - is a reference document for the “out-of-the-box” data acquisition software.
Appendix A – A Supplement to the HopNet 10 Series Wireless Modems User’s Manual. This appendix
only applies to users of Cirronet’s HopNet 10 Series Wireless Modems. In regard to using othermodems with LogBook refer to chapter 7.
Error Codes – two lists of error codes, one for LogView software and another for LogBook hardware.
Dimensional Drawings – Contains basic dimensional drawings that apply to several data acquisition
products, including LogBook/300, LogBook/360, and DBK options.
Glossary
Reference Notes:
During software installation, Adobe® PDF versions of user manuals are automaticallyinstalled onto your hard drive as a part of product support. The default location is in the
Programs directory, which can be accessed from the Windows Desktop.
For detailed information regarding specific DBKs, refer to the DBK Option Cards andModules User’s Manual PDF. Each DBK section includes device-specific hardware andsoftware information. The document includes a chapter on power management.

Check the README.TXT file for information that may not have been available at thetime this manual went to press.

LogBook User’s Manual

989492v

This page is intentionally blank.

vi

989492

LogBook User’s ManualTable of Contents
Chapter 1 – An Introduction to LogBook
LogBook Basics……1-1
What are LogBooks? ….. 1-1
Front and Rear Panels……1-2
Highlight of Features …… 1-3
LogBook/300 Block Diagram …… 1-4
LogBook/360 Block Diagram …… 1-5
The Use of PC-Cards with LogBook…..1-6
System Software……1-7

Operational Features……1-9
Data Acquisition, An Overview……1-9
LogBook System File [Must be on the PC-Card!] ……1-10
Communications……1-10
Triggering and Scan Timing……1-11
Scan Rate Limitations……1-11
Use of Outputs to Alarm and Control……1-13
Acquisition……1-13
Data Storage and Retrieval……1-13

Specifications …. 1-15

QS300 – LogBook/300 Quick Start Guide (Includes Installation Procedure)

QS360 – LogBook/360 Quick Start Guide (Includes Installation Procedure)

Chapter 4 – System Expansion
Expansion and Enhancement Options…..4-1
What are LBK Options?……4-1
What are DBK Options?……4-2
Power Options …… 4-3
Other Options …… 4-3

Considerations …… 4-4
DBK Configuration ….. 4-4
Dimensional and Environmental Factors……4-4
Mechanical Setup Options……4-5

P1, P2, P3 Port Connectors……4-6

LogBook User’s Manual

989492

vii

DBK Basics

Chapter 5 – LBK and other non-DBK OptionsLBK Options, Location Reference …… 5-1
LBK/COM/422/485 …… 5-2
LBK/MEM1-U, Expanded Memory (16 MB Upgrade) ……5-3
LBK1, Remote LogBook Terminal …… 5-4
LBK2, Four Channel, Digital-to-Analog Output …… 5-9
Remote On/Off Switch and LED Indicator Options …… 5-11

Chapter 6 – GPS and Serial Device Data Collection
Chapter 7 – Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler
Chapter 8 - CE-Compliance
Overview …… 8-1
CE Standards and Directives …… 8-1
Safety Conditions …… 8-2
Emissions/Immunity Conditions …… 8-3
CE Enhancements …… 8-3
Edge Guards for DBK5, DBK8, & DBK44 …… 8-3
DBK41/CE …… 8-4
BNC Connectors for CE Compliance …… 8-4

LogView
Understanding LogView…… LV-1
Modes of LogView Operation…… LV-2
LogView Features and Capabilities… LV-5
Software User-Interface…… LV-5
File Management...... LV-8

Note: Use of the following
Authorization Code will enable
complete LogView functionality:

Procedures…… LV-12
Flowchart of a Simple Acquisition..…. LV-13
Using an Attached LogBook…… LV-13
Using LogBook “Unattached”…… LV-15
Simple Data Logging…… LV-15
Setting Up DBK Cards…… LV-17
Using Multiple Timebases…… LV-18
Using Digital 2-Point Calibration…… LV-21
Using Digital Outputs As Alarms…… LV-22
Using Exception Capturing…… LV-24

ED7B55484273

Menu Descriptions…… LV-25
File Menu…… LV-25
View Menu…… LV-30
Hardware Configuration…… LV-30
Analog Input Channel Configuration…… LV-31
Digital and Counter Input Channel Configuration…… LV-35
Output Channels Configuration…… LV-36
Serial / GPS Channels (LogBook/360 Only)…… LV-37
Calculated-Channel Configuration…… LV-37
Acquisition Configuration…… LV-43
Preferences…… LV-46
viii

989492

LogBook User’s ManualDevice Menu…… LV-48
Select PC-Card...... LV-48
Select LogBook…… LV-48
Attach…… LV-48
Break…… LV-48
Arm Acquisition…… LV-48
Stop Acquisition…… LV-48
LogBook Monitor …… LV-49
Explorer…… LV-50

Tools Menu…… LV-51
Convert Binary Data…… LV-51
Merging Binary Data…… LV-53
View Data …… LV-54

Indicators Menu…… LV-55
Bar Graph Meters…… LV-55
Analog Meters…… LV-55
Digital Meters…… LV-56
Meters Configuration…… LV-56
Enable Input Reading Column…… LV-58
Start (or Stop) All Indicators…… LV-58

Appendix A – Supplement to the HopNet 10 Series
Wireless Modems User’s Manual
Error Codes
Dimensional Drawings
Glossary

LogBook User’s Manual

989492ix

This page is intentionally blank.

x989492

LogBook User’s Manual

An Introduction to LogBook

1

LogBook Basics……1-1

What are LogBooks? ….. 1-1
Front and Rear Panels……1-2
Highlight of Features …… 1-3
LogBook/300 Block Diagram …… 1-4
LogBook/360 Block Diagram …… 1-5
The Use of PC-Cards with LogBook …. 1-6
System Software……1-8

Operational Features……1-8

Data Acquisition Overview……1-8
LogBook System File [Must be on the PC-Card!] ……1-9
Communications……1-10
Triggering and Scan Timing……1-11
Scan Rate Limitations……1-11
Use of Outputs to Alarm and Control……1-13
Acquisition……1-13
Data Storage and Retrieval……1-13

Specifications …… 1-15

LogBook Basics
What are LogBooks?
LogBook/300 and LogBook/360 are PC-based data acquisition systems that can work in a stand-alone
mode (no PC present), or linked to a PC. They combine onboard intelligence with a removable PC-Card
that stores the configuration file and the collected data. LogBooks have many options, most of which aredetailed in the LBK chapter, and in the DBK Option Cards and Modules document. Note that the PC link
can be by serial or parallel port.

LogBook/300, Simple System Setup

The PC-Card holds the configuration file [created by LogView]. The file tells LogBook how to perform aparticular acquisition. The PC-Card also holds the acquired data files. The PC can upload to or downloadfrom the PC-Card by cable if the PC is attached to LogBook, or by physical transport of the PC-Card fromone unit to the other. Multiple configuration files and multiple PC-Cards allow the system to handle
complex data acquisition environments with a large number of data-files.

LogBook User’s Manual

969591An Introduction to LogBook

1-1

Front and Rear Panels
Note: Descriptions of panel items appear on the following page.

LogBook/360, Front Panel

LogBook/360, Terminal Panels (A combination of 3 make up the rear panel)

LogBook/300, Front Panel

Note: In earlier models, the PC-Card Door has a right-edge hinge (not shown).

LogBook/300, Rear Panel
1-2

An Introduction to LogBook

969591

LogBook User’s Manual

LogBook/360 panel items are listed in the following table. Note that LogBook/300 panel items are the same as those on
the 360, except as called out in the following bulleted list:
Slight differences in the overlay.
P1, P2, and P3 appear on LogBook/300’s rear panel.
LogBook/300 has no SERIAL GPS connection.

LogBook/300 has no SERIAL AUX connection.
LogBook/300 has no CHASSIS grounding post.
LogBook/300 does not make use of Terminal Panels.

Switches
ON/OFF

Depressing the push-button switch turns the power on.

(interior rotary switch)

PC-Card door provides access to a rotary switch to set device address when used in an RS-485 network.

Connectors
POWER IN

This locking DIN5 input connector accepts +10 to +45 VDC.

PARALLEL PORT

This DB-25 plug is a parallel port connector to a host PC (set to ECP mode)

TERMINAL PORT (TO LBK1)This DB-9 socket is a serial port connector for the LBK1 remote control panel (user-interface terminal).

SERIAL COMM
(TO PC OR MODEM)

This DB-9 male serial COM port connects to a host PC or modem.

SERIAL GPS(LogBook/360 Only)

LogBook/360 only. This DB-9 male serial port option connects to a Global Positioning System.

SERIAL AUX(LogBook/360 Only)

LogBook/360 only. This DB-9 male serial port option connects to optional auxiliary devices.

P1 - ANALOG I/OProvides 16 analog input channels, 3 TTL inputs, and various signals for driving expansion cards.

P2 - DIGITAL I/OProvides 3 8-bit TTL programmable I/O ports and external interrupt input.

P3 - PULSE FREQUENCY /HIGH-SPEED DIGITAL I/OProvides 4 16-bit counters, 4 analog outputs, and 16 high-speed digital I/O.

(PC-Card door, no label)

Door provides access to PCMCIA connector—for removable PC-Card memory devices.

Indicator LEDs
POWER

LED lights when power is applied to LogBook and the power switch is depressed into the ON position.

ERROR

LED lights steady ON when a routine error occurs (e.g. disk full).
LED flashes for fatal errors; refer to Hardware Errors near the end of the manual.
No data can be acquired until the error is cleared.

TRIGGERED

LED lights after trigger event and during an A/D scan sequence.

ACTIVE

LED lights to show that LogBook is ready to begin a scan at the next trigger event.

Safe-Swap Light(interior green LED)

LED lights when it is safe to swap PC-Cards.

Highlight of Features
LogBooks can be left unattended for long testing periods and used in environments not suitable for PCs.
With the use of PC-Cards, one PC can support several LogBooks. Other LogBook features include:
Onboard processor capable of real-time data reduction and system control in stand-alone mode
Non-volatile storage of configuration files and samples via removable, transportable PC-Cards
4 MB RAM onboard, expandable to 16 MB
100 kHz 16-bit Analog-to-Digital Conversion
8 differential, 16 single-ended inputs; expandable to 256 input channels via DBK cards
7 gain/input ranges, unipolar and bipolar
40 digital I/O lines, expandable to 208
4 pulse-counting inputs
Gain and unipolar/bipolar settings are programmed in real time (10 µs max)
Scan-sequence memory (1024 analog channels plus 128 digital channels)
for any combination of channels/gains
Input power: 10 to 45 VDC (AC adapter included)
LBK options
DBK options

LogBook User’s Manual

969591An Introduction to LogBook

1-3

LogBook/300 Block Diagram

1-4

An Introduction to LogBook

969591

LogBook User’s Manual

LogBook/360 Block Diagram

LogBook User’s Manual

969591An Introduction to LogBook

1-5

The following components are represented in the previous block diagrams. Certain items apply only to
LogBook/360, as noted.
Removable PC-Card. A 12-520 MB capacity holds the software, operating system, user
configurations and the acquired data. The PC-Card is at the center of LogBook operations.
A PC-Card [pre-programmed by LogView] ensures an unattached LogBook comes up properly.
Power Supply. The internal power supply accepts an input of 10 to 45 VDC and supplies filteredregulated voltages to its internal circuits and to accessories connected via P1/2/3. An external
AC to-DC adapter for all standard voltages is included with the system.
System Controller. A microprocessor chip is used within LogBook with either 4 MB (standard) of
RAM or 16 MB (optional). A field-upgradeable 512 KB Flash memory is used to store the systemstartup code, self-diagnostics, and Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) configuration. The
FPGA controls every LogBook operation, including real-time control. By using Internal flash
memory instead of EPROMs, field upgrades of virtually all functions [including FPGA circuitry] arepossible. Most software will be read from the disk drive.
Analog Input via P1. 16 main channels that can each accommodate 16 sub-channels via
multiplexing for a total of 256 analog input channels. Fault protection and buffer circuits prevent
overloads and cross-channel noise due to impedance mismatch.
A/D Converter. The A/D converter uses 16-bit resolution @ 100 kHz sample rate.
Digital I/O. 16 high-speed digital inputs via P3, three 8-bit TTL programmable I/O ports via P2,
three TTL inputs via P1. Note that LogBook/360 has P1, P2, and P3 connectors on the motherboardthat are connected [by ribbon cable] to secondary P1, P2, and P3 connectors [located on the chassis
front panel]. LogBook/300’s P1, P2, and P3 are located on the rear panel.
LBK2 Analog Output (optional): This option provides four channels of analog output,
16-bit @ 100 kHz @ ±10 VDC.
LogBook/360 only, Interconnect Board, Card Drawer (for three DBK cards), andthree Terminal Panels.
Computer/Control/I/O – Includes: PARALLEL PORT (ECP Mode), SERIAL PORT (for RS-232
or RS-422/485), TERMINAL PORT (for LBK1 LogBook Remote Terminal option). In addition, for
LogBook/360 only, there is a COM Expansion Card with two serial ports (SERIAL AUX andSERIAL GPS). These two ports are for connecting auxiliary serial devices, such as a Global
Positioning System.

The Use of PC-Cards with LogBook
After the initial setup, you can interact with LogBook via PC-Cards. A safe-swap LED (inside the PC-Cardaccess door) lights when it is safe to change PC-Cards. You can also interact with LogBook using the
LBK1 Remote Terminal Panel option (discussed in the LBK chapter). The LBK1 option provides limited
LogBook control without use of the LogView program. As can be seen from the following PC-Card
Compatibility information, some PC-Cards should be avoided in regard to use with LogBook.
Note: during operation, LogView is the primary system interface for control and configuration.
PC-Card Compatibility with LogBook Operation
To work properly, the LogBook requires compatible PC-Card memory. You can purchase 100%
compatible cards through your LogBook sales representative. If you prefer to buy your card from anothersource, make sure it is an ATA-style memory card. Also, make sure the card's memory capacity is sufficientfor your purpose.
You can change PC-Cards to load setup files, replace full cards, or transport data to an unattached PC.
When the PC-Card door is opened, a detector starts a preparatory routine to clean up files on the installed
disk. Within a few seconds, a green LED indicates it is safe to swap PC-Cards. Swapping should be donequickly to prevent gaps in the recorded data. 4 MB RAM provides about
10 seconds at 100 kHz and 1.75 minutes at 10 kHz. 16 MB RAM provides over a minute at 100 kHz andabout 12 minutes at 10 kHz for one-channel scans.

1-6

An Introduction to LogBook

969591

LogBook User’s ManualSwapping PC-Cards in a LogBook/300

Note: Some models have PC-Card doors with right-edge hinges (not shown).

Swapping time is measured from when the door opens. Keep door closed unless you arein the process of swapping cards.
PC-Cards must be pre-configured by LogView—if anticipating the need for multiple cards,
download the exact SAME ACQUISITION SETUP FILE to each PC-Card.
The PCMCIA slot accepts a Type I, II, or III hard-disk card or ATA flash-memorysolid-state card.

How to Download a Configuration to a PC-Card
The download of a configuration to a PC-Card can be done in either of two ways, both of which make useof LogView’s <Download> button. One method is to download the file to the PC-Card while it is installed
in a card slot on the PC. The second method is to download the file while the PC-Card is in a LogBook. In
that scenario the LogBook must be connected to the serial or parallel port of a PC. A brief description ofboth methods follows. In both cases the filename will be the same as the LogView setup name.
Download Method I:
PC-Card in Computer’s PC-Card Slot

Download Method II:
PC-Card in LogBook’s PC-Card Slot

LogView’s <Download> button as it appears
when a PC-Card in the PC can accept adownload.

1. Insert a formatted PC-Card into the computer’s
PC-card slot.
2. Run LogView.
3. From LogView’s Device pull-down menu choose―
Select PC Card.‖
4. Select the applicable PC-Card drive from theresulting pull-down list.
5. Click LogView’s <DownLoad> button.

LogView’s <Download> button as it appears
when a PC-Card in the LogBook can accept adownload.

For this method the LogBook must be connected to
the PC’s serial* or parallel port.
1. Insert a formatted PC-Card into LogBook’s
PC-Card slot.
2. Run LogView.
3. From LogView’s Device pull-down menu.
choose ―Select LogBook.‖
4. Click on the desired LogBook.
5. Click the <Attach> button.
6. Click LogView’s <DownLoad> button.

*Note: For method II only, if downloading a modem configuration, LogBook’s communication cable must
connect to a parallel port on the PC. Otherwise parallel or serial communications will do.
Reference Notes:
Additional information regarding PC-Cards can be found in the chapter sections entitled,
Data Acquisition Overview (page 1-8) and LogBook System File (page 1-9).
For information regarding LogView, refer to the independent LogView section of this manual.

LogBook User’s Manual

969591An Introduction to LogBook

1-7

System Software
LogBook software includes LogView, Upload Scheduler (optional) and a post acquisition data analysis
application such as eZ-PostView. A synopsis of each application follows.
LogView is a ready-to-use Windows-based program for data acquisition and logging. The programprovides a means of selecting channels, gains, transducer types, and various parameters. After setting
up the configuration on the PC, you must download the configuration file to LogBook’s PC-Card.
LogBook then uses the PC-Card to start the pre-configured acquisition. During an acquisition,
LogView can display channel values on its Graphical User Interface in the form of a spreadsheet,bargraph, analog meter, or digital indicator. LogBook data can be uploaded to your PC in various
data formats (Excel™, SnapMaster™, MATLAB™, DASYLab™, Lotus®, Quattro, and ASCII) forcompatibility with virtually all post-acquisition analysis software.
Upload Scheduler is an application that exists as part of the LogBook/Modem option. Upload
Scheduler allows you to configure upload events for one or more LogBooks. A scheduled event canbe configured to execute one time, or periodically, with no post-configuration intervention by theuser. The Upload Scheduler is detailed in chapter 7, Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler.
Post Acquisition Data Analysis programs provide a means of viewing and analyzing data via
interactive graphics. Refer to the document module for detailed information. The post data analysis
programs are discussed in an independent document. PDF versions of the documents are loaded on
to your computer’s hard drive during software installation. The default location for the files is thePrograms group, which is accessible from the Windows Desktop.

Operational Features
Data Acquisition Overview
Note: Acquired data is signal-conditioned before it is logged (recorded by LogBook). The data can bepost-processed via analytical programs.
A Sensor/Transducer reacts to a physical quantity (such as stress, strain, frequency, temperature,acceleration, light intensity, etc) and encodes that quantity into an analogous electrical signal. A wide
variety of transducers produce signals that vary in type and strength—some generate a voltage; others alter
an electrical property. As the measured condition changes, the analog sensor signal can vary directly orinversely and in a linear or non-linear way.

Although LogBook can read volts directly, many sensor types still require signal
conditioning before they can be correctly interpreted.
The Signal Conditioner changes the raw transducer signal into a voltage for use by
LogBook’s Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC). Depending on signal quality, several steps may be
involved (e.g., linearization, isolation of high voltages, amplification of weak signals, attenuation of strong
signals, filtering of noise and irrelevant frequencies, differential voltage measurement, simultaneous sampleand-hold, and pulse/current-to-voltage conversions). DBK option modules are designed for conditioning aparticular type of transducer signal. The signal conditioner’s output voltage range is ―normalized‖ to auser-selected range for the measured values.
Note: Multi-channel DBKs can multiplex several input signals into one of LogBook’s 16 main inputs.
Multiplexing up to 16 analog channels for each LogBook main channel allows system expansion
up to 256 analog input channels.

1-8

An Introduction to LogBook

969591

LogBook User’s Manual

LogBook’s onboard microprocessor and PC-Card allow it to operate independent of a host PC.
Functionally, LogBook can perform:
Analog-to-Digital Conversion. The ADC changes a conditioned analog signal to a corresponding
digital value. LogBook’s 16-bit ADC uses 65,536 numbers (216) to quantify values within thespecified range and gain. Each input channel’s buffer amplifier ensures constant input impedance.
The buffers also eliminate any noise effects from multiplexing of the input signals.
Acquisition Control. The microprocessor controls the data acquisition by managing trigger
conditions, gains, offsets, scan sequencing, and data formatting. LogBook can continuously collectinformation, or be used for exception-capturing (with triggers). Pre-trigger and post-triggers allow
for capture of specific data, thus making more efficient use of memory.
Analog and Digital I/O. With the standard digital I/O, standard analog input, and the optional
analog output board, LogBook can perform virtually any data acquisition task as well as more
complex tasks for alarm and control systems.
Data Logging. Data can be saved in one of several formats and later downloaded to a PC.
Communication with PC. LogBook provides for serial and parallel port communication. In thestand-alone mode, the PC-Card must be manually transported between the PC and LogBook.
The PC-Card is a memory device (rotating or flash, PCMCIA types I, II, or III)) that holds the system
software and the acquired data in multiple formats. System software includes the configuration file that
directs a specific acquisition and LogBook’s operating system. The PC-Card as programmed in LogView
allows LogBook to operate without PC intervention if so desired. LogView can configure a PC-Card in
LogBook if the PC and LogBook are electronically connected via serial or parallel port. In a stand-alonemode, the PC-Card must be physically transported between a PC with LogView and one or more LogBooks
for uploading and downloading. Using a 500-Mbyte PC-Card, for example, you can store up to 250 million
samples in non-volatile memory; that equates to more than forty minutes of recording time on one channel
at the full 100 kHz acquisition rate. For continuous data collection, PC-Cards can be swapped while theacquisition is taking place. As one card becomes nearly full, it can be removed and another card inserted
without causing a gap in the acquired data.
The user’s PC (typically a laptop or desktop) runs the supplied LogView software. LogView’s userinterface includes a virtual instrument panel with meters and controls to fit various applications. ThroughLogView you can configure the system, apply further data processing, or manage multiple LogBooks.
LogView stores data in a conventional format so that other software can use the acquired data for analysis,control, alarms, reporting, etc.
Note: The PC can be attached to LogBook via a serial or parallel connection; alternatively in the standalone mode, the PC can be unattached and communicate with LogBook via a PC-Card that is
manually transferred between the PC and LogBook.

LogBook System File [ Must be on the PC-Card! ]The file logbook.sys is LogBook’s operating system. Without it, LogBook will not work.
In fact, if the logbook.sys file is not on LogBook’s internal PC-Card, the LogBook will not
power-on.
After software is installed [as discussed in the Quick Start sections] the 500-KB logbook.sys file willreside in the LogView folder (on the hard drive of the host PC). To be used by a LogBook, logbook.sys
must have already been downloaded to the PC-Card, which resides inside LogBook.
Downloading. When LogView downloads the *.lvc acquisition setup file to a PC-Card, it checks to see if
the current release version of logbook.sys is already on the PC-Card. If so, fine; if not, logbook.sys
must also be downloaded to the PC-Card. Thus, downloading to a PC-Card that is being used for the firsttime will take longer than subsequent downloads.
Failure to upgrade to the current release version of logbook.sys can result in software
glitches. This problem can be resolved by reformatting the PC-Card using Windows
Explorer’s File/Format feature, and then reinitializing the PC-Card.

LogBook User’s Manual

969591An Introduction to LogBook

1-9

Due to the file size and relative transfer time, insert first-time PC-Cards into the PC’s card
socket rather than LogBook’s. Downloading via the PC’s socket takes only a few seconds;
however, using LogBook’s socket and a communications channel will take much longer(about 7 minutes at 9600 bps).
Regarding the logbook.sys file and Power Loss. After LogBook is started, it can store data to a
PC-Card that does not have the logbook.sys file. However, in this case if LogBook loses power it will
not be able to restart! LogBook will restart when powered-on with a PC-Card that does have thelogbook.sys file.
Because LogBook needs the logbook.sys file to become operational after loosing power(due to an outage or being turned off), keep the logbook.sys file on all PC-Cards that will
be used for data storage.

Communications
Protocols
LogBook uses only standard, supported, widely available communication channels to minimize devicedriver development. The messages transmitted over these channels are also standard: human-readable
ASCII for commands and status, and standard file-transfer protocols (such as X-modem) for block datatransfers. The messages and protocols are independent of the choice of communication channel, except
when a channel explicitly requires a different protocol (such as FTP over TCP/IP). The use of suchstandards makes LogBook easier to use and extend.
To implement these standards, LogBook includes a command parser and conversion software to convert
measured voltages into physical measurements such as temperature, force, or acceleration. This software isused for monitoring transducer measurements, both at the PC and the LBK1. LogBook can return all dataas physical quantities and/or raw voltage measurements.
Large blocks of raw or converted data (such as entire acquisitions or a set of consecutive scans) aretransferred as binary files, using file-transfer protocols. Smaller blocks (such as individual readings orscans) are transferred in readable ASCII.
Parallel Port – ECP Mode
LogBook includes an ECP parallel port for high-speed local communication with a PC in the ECP mode(the only supported protocol is ECP). Your PC mode may need to be changed in its BIOS or in the
Window Settings—consult your PC’s documentation or the PC’s manufacturer as needed.
Serial Port
LogBook includes an RS-232 (RS-422/485 optional, call factory for availability) serial port supporting both
point-to-point and multi-drop remote communication.
Other Communication Channels
The serial communication protocols are standard so non-PC hosts can communicate with LogBook. The
use of printable ASCII for commands and status and the use of standard file-transfer protocols make itpractical to add additional ports such as USB, IEEE 488, TCP/IP. Consult factory for availability of thesecommunication options.

1-10

An Introduction to LogBook

969591

LogBook User’s ManualTriggering and Scan Timing
Reference Note: For information on defining triggering conditions through LogView, referto the Acquisition Configuration text and screen shots, which are provided in the LogView
document module.
If data collection is desired only under specific conditions, you can specify appropriate trigger conditions.
By defining a trigger, pre-trigger, and post-trigger, you can collect data surrounding a specific event. This
event can be an absolute time or a defined condition such as a particular analog channel measuring a certain
quantity. If a calculated channel is chosen as the trigger source, you have greater flexibility in defining thetrigger based on multiple inputs and conditional logic. An auto re-arm feature allows many successive
acquisitions to take place automatically, with each acquisition using the same settings.
LogBook can be triggered by several types of sources, including analog and digital triggering, multi-step
triggering, multi-channel triggering, time-of-day triggering, and manual trigger. The manual trigger can be
implemented in the following ways:
With a computer attached, you can trigger LogBook from LogView’s LogBook Monitor window.
Without a computer, you can use a manual trigger switch by attaching it to the TTL trigger input(pin 25, on P1).
With a logic device you can engage the TTL trigger on P1’s pin 25, as programmed.
Without a computer, you can use the LBK1’s manual trigger button.
LogBook time-of-day clock has 1/256-second resolution for data-logging applications where acquisitions
must be performed at specific times during the day. The time of occurrence of each acquisition and its
trigger are also recorded with the data. The scan-to-scan timing may be set by a fixed-frequency pacer
clock. Or, an external clock can start each scan individually to allow the scan rate to track a variable-speed
event (such as engine revolutions).
Note: Time-stamping is done in 1/256-second units; but the absolute trigger is in 1-second units.
For data acquisition applications that include both fast and slow signals, multiple sample rates can be
configured. In the acquisition setup dialog box, a primary acquisition rate and divisors for up to 3 more
rates can be configured. Using multiple sample rates, fast signals like vibration can be sampled at a highrate while slow signals like thermocouples are sampled at lower rates, optimizing the system’s storage
capacity.

Scan Rate Limitations
LogBook’s internal clock runs at 100 kHz, and this is the fastest scan rate possible with just one input
channel in the scan list and no outputs. As input, calculated, and output channels are added to the scan list,
the usable scan rate is correspondingly reduced. The system does not automatically compute an optimum
scan rate for you. However, LogView will generate an error message in the LogBook Monitor window if
timing problems occur, and the following sections explain such problems and how to solve them.
External TTL Trigger and Stop Events
An external TTL trigger can repeat before the trigger block completes; extra trigger signals will be ignored.
Likewise, multiple stop signals received before restarting the next scan will be ignored. Such ignored
signals are noted in the LogBook Monitor window as ―Losing Trigger Events‖ and ―Losing Stop Events‖.
Problems Arising From Too Fast a Scan Rate
If the user-specified scan rate does not provide enough time to complete the necessary tasks of the entire
scan list, various problems can occur. Bear in mind that LogBook places the highest priority on reading
input channels—it is primarily a data logger. Also realize that calculated and output channels are based on
input channels and come typically at the end of the scan list. Thus, if the scan rate is too fast and the next
sequence begins before the first is completed, the outputs may suffer. When outputs can’t keep up with the
inputs, possible consequences include:
Missing/late Outputs. The outputs are not updated in a timely fashion and may not represent theirsources in real time (LogBook Monitor error message is ―Outputs Deteriorating‖).
Missed Alarms. Digital alarm outputs may not be initiated soon enough—important alarms might
never go off.
LogBook User’s Manual

969591An Introduction to LogBook

1-11

Faulty Control. Control systems based on digital outputs or a DBK25 could fail if dependent on afast critical response time.
Distorted Outputs. Analog outputs may appear to be "jaggy" or other distortions such as aliasingtype errors.
Ideally, each output signal is based on one input, resulting inan accurate output waveform. Factors such as scan rate,
number of output channels and calculated channels canoverload the system, resulting in one output signal for
multiple input scans. The resulting signal deterioration can
increase over time and shows up as a distorted and/or lagging
output signal. Such output errors can resemble aliasing
errors where output signals are distorted from their input
signals because the effective sampling frequency was nothigh enough (see figure).
Output Signal Deterioration
Solutions To Scan Rate Problems
To confirm a suspected timing problem with your acquisition, run the acquisition and then check:
The LogBook Monitor window in LogView for a corresponding error message.
Actual deterioration of outputs as described in the previous section.
To solve timing problems you may need to perform one or more of the following, in order of effectiveness:
Choose a slower scan rate, or change the trigger parameters.
Reduce the number of output channels.
Reduce the number or complexity of calculated channels.
Reduce the number of input channels.
Estimating an Optimum Scan Rate
Note:

The scan rate can be measured as a frequency in Hz or kHz or as a period in ms or µs. These
two measures are reciprocals of each other; e.g., 1/100 kHz = 10 µs.

Processing input channels is LogBook’s highest priority; each input channel is collected at 10 µs. After all
the inputs are collected, LogBook performs the necessary calculations and then updates the enabled outputs.
The time to perform calculations and outputs varies with the type of calculation, and this makes it difficult
to predict the exact length of time required. Simple calculations are done much faster than functions for
non-linear thermocouples and RTDs or the use of logical and bitwise calculated channels. Output channels
can take from 100 µs to 300 µs; so for very approximate results, we’ll use 200 µs.
To estimate the maximum scan rate, use the following formula:approximate scan period = (number of inputs × 10 µs) + (number of outputs × 200 µs)
If only 5 input channels are enabled, the scan period equals 50 µs with a frequency of 20 kHz. If one output
channel is added, the period becomes 250 µs with a frequency of 4 kHz.
After running the acquisition, check the LogBook Monitor screen for error messages.
A list of Software and Hardware-related error codes is included near the end of the manual.

1-12

An Introduction to LogBook

969591

LogBook User’s ManualUse of Outputs to Alarm and Control
Reference Note: For information on how LogView allows you to set outputs
based on user-defined conditions, refer to the LogView document module’s section entitled,
Calculated-Channel Configuration.
By careful setup of LogBook’s analog and digital outputs, you can control external devices and/or stimulate
the unit-under-test. Using LogView’s calculated channels, equations can be derived that can be used tostimulate digital outputs for use as alarms or for on/off control. For example, the equation:
DIG1 = (CH1 - CH2) < 2
turns on digital output ―1‖ if the difference between channels 1 and 2 is less than 2.
The system’s four 16-bit analog outputs can also be used for controlling or stimulating external devices.
Using channel data derived from input channels and equations or canned waveforms, the analog outputs canbe updated at rates as high as 100 kHz.

Acquisition
A selected acquisition can be armed:
on command from the keypad or PC
at power-on, orAfter an acquisition, LogBook may continue the same or begin a new acquisition. The new acquisition can
begin immediately, after a specified time interval, or at a specified time.

Data Storage and Retrieval
The quantity of acquired data can be reduced by block averaging or by decimation (skipping samples
without averaging). Then, data is placed onto the DOS-compatible disk drive using a proprietary format in
a DOS-compatible file. The acquisition setup name and a time stamp are also written to disk.
Post-processing programs can thereby correctly interpret the related data.
The PC can retrieve the acquired data through the serial or parallel port, during or after the acquisition.
Upon command from the PC, LogBook can switch to storing data into a new file. After the PC retrieves
data [from the first file], it can erase that file and reuse the space.
Note: Data is never erased without a specific command from the PC.
Data can also be retrieved from a PC-Card. LogBook copies enough information from the old card to thenew (replacement) card to make sure the current acquisition can continue on the replacement PC-Card.
Replacement PC-Cards for use with LogBook must be pre-configured in order to store
acquisition data.

LogBook User’s Manual

969591An Introduction to LogBook

1-13

1-14

An Introduction to LogBook

969591

LogBook User’s Manual

LogBook Specifications

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

GeneralSupply Voltage Range: 10 to 45.0 VDCPower Consumption: 0.9 A @ 15 VDC
Operating Temperature: -40° to 140°F (-40°C to 60°C)
Storage Temperature: -40° to 176°F (-40°C to 80°C)
Humidity: 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing
PC-Card Memory: Standard ATA Type

LogBook/300:
Size: 8½ × 11 × 1¾ in. (216 × 279 × 44 mm)
Weight: 3.3 lb (1.5 kg)
LogBook/360:
Size: 14 × 11 × 3.5 in. (356 x 279 × 89 mm)
Weight: 7.3 lb (3.3 kg)

A/D Specifications
Type: Successive approximation
Resolution: 16 bit
Conversion Time: 10 µs

Monotinicity: No missing codes
Linearity: ±1 bit

Analog Inputs
Channels: 16 single-ended, 8 differential,
expandable up to 256 differential; singleended or differential operation is software
programmable.
Connector: DB37 male, P1
Maximum Overvoltage: -35 V, +45 V
Input Current:
Differential: 0.4 µA typical, 0.7 µA max
Single-ended: 0.2 µA typical, 0.35 µA max
Input Impedance:
10 M

differential in parallel with 20 pF

5M

single-ended in parallel with 30 pF

Calibration: Digital software calibration
Channel-to-channel Crosstalk: 100 dB

Ranges: Unipolar/Bipolar operation is software-programmableon a per-channel basis.

BIPOLAR±(% Reading + µV)

±10V
±5V
±2.5V
±1.25V±0.625V±0.3125V±0.15625V

0.015 + 500
0.015 + 500
0.015 + 300
0.015 + 250
0.015 + 150
0.020 + 150
0.050 + 100

UNIPOLAR±(% Reading + µV)

0 to +20V
0 to +10V
0 to +5V
0 to +2.5V
0 to +1.25V
0 to +0.625V
0 to +0.3125V

0.015 + 500
0.015 + 500
0.015 + 300
0.015 + 250
0.015 + 150
0.020 + 150
0.050 + 100

Triggering
Analog Trigger:

Software Trigger:

Programmable Level Range: full range of
specified channel

Trigger to A/D Latency: Dependent on PC
Pre-Trigger: Up to 4 gig scans, depends on
PC-card memory

Trigger to A/D Latency: 10 µs max
Digital Trigger:
Logic Level Range: 0.8 V low/2.2 V high
Trigger to A/D Latency: 10 µs max

LogBook User’s Manual

969591An Introduction to LogBook

1-15

Sequencer
Randomly programmable for channel and gain and for
unipolar/bipolar (where applicable)
Depth: 1024 analog channels plus 128 digitalchannels
Channel to Channel Rate: 10 µs/channel, fixed

Maximum Rep Rate: 100 kHz
Minimum Rep Rate: 10 hours
Expansion Channel Sample Rate: Same as on-board
channels, 10 µs/channel

General Purpose Digital I/O
24 I/O channels, expandable up to 192

Output Current:

Connector: DB37 male, P2

Maximum Source Current: 2.5 mA

Device: 82C55

Maximum Sink Current: -2.5 mA

Maximum Input and Update Rate: 100 kHz

Input Voltage Levels:
Minimum Required “1" Voltage Level: 2.0 V

Output Voltage Levels:

Maximum Allowed ”0" Voltage Level: 0.8 V

Minimum “1" Voltage: 3.0 @ 2.5 mA sourcing
Maximum ”0" Voltage: 0.4 @ 2.5 mA sinking

Output Float Leakage Current: 10 µA

High-Speed Digital I/O
Channels: 16 input lines

Input Low Voltage: 0.8 V max

Connector: DB37 male, P3

Input High Voltage: 2.0 V min

Maximum Sampling Rate: 100K words/s

Input Low Current: 10 µA
Input High Current: -10 µA

Frequency/Pulse Counter
Channels: 4, 16 bits per channel, cascadeable

Threshold Voltage (Low): 0.8 V typical, 0.5 V min

Connector: DBK37 male, P3

Threshold Voltage (High): 1.6 V typical, 2.1 V max

Maximum Pulse Count: 32-bit binary (2 channels
cascaded)

Hysteresis: 400 mV min

Maximum Input Rate: 1 MHz
Input Voltage: -15 to +15 V

Pulse Width (High or Low): 520 ns min
Input Impedance: 27 K
parallel with 50 pF

pull-up to +5 V in

Frequency/Pulse Generator
Channels: 2, 16 bits per channel

Input Low Current: -10.0 µA max

Connector: DB37 male, P3

Input High Current: 10.0 µA max

Frequency/Pulse Generating Mode: Input frequency
divided by
1 to 65,535

Output High Voltage: 2.4 V min @ -8 mA
Output Low Voltage: 0.5V max @ 8 mA

Input Low Voltage: 0.8 V max
Input High Voltage: 2.0 V min

1-16

An Introduction to LogBook

969591

LogBook User’s Manual

LogBook/300

Quick Start
Before you get started

Software Installation …… QS300-2

Verify that you have the following items.

Hardware Connection …… QS300-2

LogBook/300
TR-40U Power Supply
Serial/Parallel Patch Cable, or PC Card Reader

Hardware Configuration …… QS300-4
LogBook/300 Device Configuration …… QS300-5
Testing the Hardware …… QS300-7
Acquisition Configuration …… QS300-8
A Note about Calibration …… QS300-8

PC with ECP (Enhanced Capabilities Port)

Data Acquisition CD
Monitor: SVGA, 1024 x 768 screen resolution
Windows 2000 SP4 and Windows XP users:
PC with Intel™ Pentium [or equivalent], 1 GHz;
512 MB memory; 10 GB disk space
Windows Vista users:
PC must be Windows Vista Premium Ready

IMPORTANT! Software must be installed first!

Software Installation
1.

Close all running applications on the host PC.

2.

Remove previous version drivers, if present. You can do this through Microsoft’s Add/Remove Programs
feature.

3.

Insert the Data Acquisition CD (8.1.2 or higher) into your CD-ROM drive and wait for the PC to auto-run. An
Opening Screen will appear. If AutoRun is disabled: (a) right click Windows Start menu, (b) select Explore; and(c) double-click MasterSetup.exe. As an alternative to using the CD, you can download software from:www.mccdaq.com/products/software.aspx

4.

Click the <ENTER SETUP> button.
Note: If you are downloading software from our website, follow instructions provided there.

5.

From the hardware selection screen, select your data acquisition device then follow the on-screen instructions.

Note: To enable all LogView features:(a) From LogView’s main window, open the File pull-down menu,(b) select Authorization,(c) enter ED7B55484273 in the dialog box and apply the code.

Hardware Connection
WARNING
Electric shock hazard. Turn off power to all system-connected devices prior to connecting
or disconnecting cables, or setting hardware configurations. Failure to do so could resultin electric shock or death, and equipment damage, even under low-voltage conditions.

When using LogBook/300 in attached mode, the PC-Card [in LogBook/300] must alreadyhave the file logbook.sys. Otherwise, LogView cannot communicate with LogBook/300,
and LogBook/300 will appear dead.

QS300-2

LogBook/300 Quick Start GuideReference Notes:

Depending on the nature of your LogBook system, you may find one or more of the following
references to the LogBook User’s Manual PDF helpful. The PDF manual is included on the Data
Acquisition CD and is also available on our web-site.

o
o
o
o

For system block diagrams and operational overviews, refer to Chapter 1 of the PDF.
For information on system expansion and calculating system power, refer to Chapter 4 and to
the DBK Basics section.
For information regarding LBK options, refer to Chapter 5.
For specific DBK card information, refer to the DBK Options Manual PDF.

The following hardware-connection figure and procedure are generic; details vary with system complexity.

Note: Other power options are discussed in
the DBK Basics section of thismanual.

After verifying that all equipment power is off, hardware connection typically proceeds as follows.
Refer to the previous figure as needed.
1.

Connect LogBook/300 to PC. There are four ways for LogBook/300 to communicate with the hostPC. These are: parallel port, serial port to serial port, serial port to USB, and manual transportationof the PC-Card. Note that the parallel port method is represented in the previous figure.
a)Parallel port to parallel port – If using the parallel port, connect a DB25male to DB25female parallel cable[e.g., CA-35-2 or CA-35-6 (2ft. or 6ft. respectively)] to PARALLEL PORT on LogBook/300, and to thecorresponding parallel port on the host PC. When this method is used, the PC must be set to the ECP
mode. See ECP Parallel Port, page QS300-6 for additional information.

b)

Serial port to serial port – If using the serial port, use a null modem serial cable (CA-47) to connect the
DB9 SERIAL PORT on LogBook/300 to the corresponding DB9 serial port on the host PC.

c)Serial port to USB port - Requires an adapter kit. To connect the LogBook to a USB port you will need a
RS-232 to USB Interface Adapter Kit p/n CA-232-USB-KIT (available from Measurement Computing).
Refer to the associated Quick Start document (QS RS-232_to_USB_Interface.pdf) for a list of the kit’s
contents and for RS-232 to USB conversion instructions. The pdf is included on Data Acquisition CDd)(rev 8.1.2 and higher).
PC-Card– With PC-Card communication, LogBook/300 does not require a connection to the computer, as
communication is accomplished via the PC-Card. To provide the PC-Card with the correct configuration
file, it must be configured from the PC, through LogView. After the PC-Card is configured, it is inserted
into LogBook’s PC-Card slot, located behind the front panel door.
Reference Note:
Information pertaining to PC-Cards can be found in chapter 1 and in the LogView section of the
LogBook User’s Manual PDF.

LogBook/300 Quick Start Guide

QS300-3

2.

Connect the LogBook/300 to the DBK cards and modules. Most of the analog DBKs connect to P1
on the rear panel; the digital DBKs generally connect to P2.
Reference Note:
For DBK card related information, refer to the DBK Options Manual PDF. The document isincluded on the Data Acquisition CD and is also available on our web-site.
Note: The CA-37-x cable can daisy-chain several DBKs including the DBK41, which has a built-in
P1 bus connection for 10 DBK cards. The x in the cable part number refers to the number ofdevices that can be connected to a device, for example: a CA-37-1 cable has two DB-37
connectors, one for connecting to the LogBook and another for connecting the card or
module. Pinouts for P1, P2, and P3 are included in the System Expansion chapter.

CAUTION
For analog signal inputs via P1, do not exceed -35 VDC or +45 VDC.
Exceeding these limits could result in equipment damage.
3.

Connect DBK(s) to transducer(s). Follow instructions for the specific DBK(s) as described in the
DBK Option Cards & Modules User’s Manual, as well as instructions for the applicable transducers.

4.

Connect the LogBook/300 to a suitable power source such as theincluded AC-to-DC adapter or the optional DBK34A. DC
power sources such as a car batteries must supply 10 to 45 VDC
and use the correct DIN5 pinout (see figure). A locking DIN5
connector assures a secure power connection for applications
subject to vibration or thermal stress.

5.

Optional - Just one cable connects between the LBK1
(via RJ-11 connector) and the LogBook/300 (via a DB9 connector). The standard cable is 6 feetlong. An optional 25 foot cable is available. See chapter 5 of the LogBook User’s Manual PDF for
details regarding the installation of LBK1.

Hardware Configuration
Reference Note:
Refer to the device-specific sections of the LBK Options chapter of the user’s manual and to
the DBK Options Manual PDFs for information regarding these devices. Note that certain
DBK options require manual configuration.
LogBook/300's top cover does not need to be removed, except to add or remove an LBK option, or to
replace the fuse.
Most LogBook/300 configuration is done via software as described in the LogBook/300 Device
Configuration section of this document (page QS300-5). LogBook/300 configuration does not require thesetting of jumpers or switches, unless the RS-485 communication option is being used.

QS300-4

LogBook/300 Quick Start Guide

Upon completing the software installation, continue with LogBook/300 Device Configuration.

LogBook/300 Device Configuration
A configuration utility is supplied via a control panel applet. The LogBook Configuration applet allows
you to add a device, remove a device, or change existing configuration settings. From this same window,
you can also access a built-in utility to test the connected device for current setup and performance.
LogBook Configuration can be found in the Microsoft Windows Control Panel. The Control Panel can benavigated to from Windows desktop Start button as follows:
Start

Settings

Control Panel

You can enter LogBook Configuration during driver installation or whenever you wish to add, remove orchange device configuration settings.
The first configuration window will display configured devices in the Device Inventory field based on theport they’re connected to. Devices are represented by an icon and text, e.g., LogBook (LPT1), as can beseen in the following figure. If no devices are configured, the device inventory field will remain blank.
The figure shows the first and second configuration windows overlapped.

LogBook Configuration Windows
The four buttons across the bottom of the first configuration window (previous figure) are used as follows:
Properties. Configuration settings for a device can be changed or modified from the corresponding
properties window. To do so, double-click the device icon or single-click the device and then singleclick the Properties button. The second configuration window will appear for the selected device asshown in the previous figure.
Add Device. The Add Device button is used to add a device configuration whenever a new device isadded to the system. LogView cannot recognize a device unless listed in the configuration window.
Remove. The Remove button is used to remove a device from the configuration. A device may beremoved if it is no longer installed or if the device’s configuration no longer applies.
Close. The Close button may be used at any time to exit the LogBook Configuration applet.

The second configuration window displays the properties for the selected LogBook/300. Fields include:
LogBook/300 Quick Start Guide

QS300-5

Device Name is displayed with the default name, numbered successively as configured. This field canbe changed to any descriptive name as desired.
Connection Type can be serial or parallel port.
Device Connection specifies the port name.
Protocol is used to set the parallel port protocol (ECP only) or serial protocol (RS-232 or RS-485).
Device Timeout specifies the number of seconds LogView will be wait for a LogBook response before
displaying an error condition.

ECP Parallel Port
To use parallel port communication with an attached LogBook/300, your PC must
support the ECP protocol AND be set in the ECP mode.

The majority of today’s PCs support the Enhanced Computer Port protocol (ECP). If your computer does
not support ECP, you can communicate with the LogBook/300 via the RS-232 serial port, or you can add an
ECP-compatible ISA board or PC-Card parallel port. Setting the PC to ECP mode varies with different
computers. On some computers, you can enter the BIOS Setup utility from Windows Settings or during
startup by pressing the F1 function key. The Parallel Port Mode property can be found under the Peripheral
Configuration group menu item. If necessary, consult your PC’s documentation or your PC’s manufacturer.
To ensure ECP compatibility after proper setup, use the Test Hardware utility(described on page QS300-7). Before testing, make sure LogBook/300 is properly
connected, powered on, and that the Parallel Port Mode is set to ECP (in BIOS Setup).

CAUTION
Making errors in BIOS Setup can disrupt your system’s operation. If test hardware
indicates a problem and you have inadequate experience with the BIOS Setup utility,
consult your System Administrator or other qualified individual.

QS300-6

LogBook/300 Quick Start Guide

Serial Port
If the selected device is connected to a serial port the properties window will include the fields shown in thefollowing figure. Baud rate can be set from 1200 to 115200 bits per second (default 9600). When all fields
have been changed to the desired settings, you can click on one of the following options:
Apply to store the device configuration. Parameters are not locked in until you click the Apply button.
If you make changes and don’t click Apply, clicking the Test button in Test Hardware will yield
unexpected errors.
OK to store the configuration and exit the current property screen.
Cancel to exit the current screen without storing any changes.
Test Hardware to test the current device.

LogBook Properties Tab

Test Hardware Tab

Testing the Hardware
Before testing LogBook/300:(a) Verify the device has been properly installed(b) Make sure the communication cable (serial or parallel) is firmly in place to the proper ports.
(c) Verify the device is powered-on.
Testing the LogBook/300 device might cause the system to hang. If test results are notdisplayed within 30 seconds, or if the system does not respond properly do the following:
Reboot the system.
Upon power-up, re-enter the LogBook Configuration.
Ensure the configuration settings are correct. Change the settings as applicable.
To begin the test, click the Test button. Test results should be displayed within a few seconds.
Test results indicate if the device is online (properly connected, powered on and ready to transfer the data)
or offline. If the device is online, Performance Test will display Download and Upload speed rates. These
rates represent the maximum speed at which downloading and uploading files can be performed. Actual
transfer time will depend on channel configuration and the size of the transfer.

LogBook/300 Quick Start Guide

QS300-7

Acquisition Configuration
An acquisition is configured using LogView on a PC and then stored as an acquisition setup file on a
PC-Card. The PC-Card may be in an attached LogBook/300 or in the PC to be later manually transferred toan unattached LogBook/300. The system’s DBK cards are listed; the scan sequence is defined; the trigger
conditions are specified, etc.
Reference Note:
Configuring the acquisition is described in the LogView section of the LogBook User’s
Manual PDF, which is included on the Data Acquisition CD and on our web-site.

A Note about Calibration
Calibration is typically performed automatically through LogView software; however, some DBKs may
require manual calibration. LogView’s 2-point calibration fine-tunes the reading’s slope and offset error(mx+b). DBKs working with non-linear sensors typically condition/convert the reading to a linear form.
Otherwise, a non-linear analog input signal is difficult to read accurately. Careful use of the calculatedchannels may yield usable approximations in simple, limited-range conditions.

Reference Notes:
An example of 2-point calibration is provided under the Procedures heading in the
LogView section of the manual.
For information on calibrating the DBK16 and the DBK43A, refer to the
DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual (p/n 457-0905).

QS300-8

LogBook/300 Quick Start Guide

LogBook/360

Quick Start Guide

Software Installation …… QS360-1
Setting Up the Card Drawer …… QS360-3
Connecting the LogBook/360 to the PC,
External DBKs, and Power …… QS360-6
Hardware Configuration …… QS360-7
LogBook/360 Device Configuration… QS360-8
Testing the Hardware …… QS360-10
Acquisition Configuration …… QS360-10
A Note About Calibration …… QS360-11

Before you get started

verify that you have the following items.
LogBook/300
TR-40U Power Supply
Serial/Parallel Patch Cable, or PC Card Reader
PC with ECP (Enhanced Capabilities Port)

Data Acquisition CD
Monitor: SVGA, 1024 x 768 screen resolution
Windows 2000 SP4 and Windows XP users:
PC with Intel™ Pentium [or equivalent], 1 GHz;
512 MB memory; 10 GB disk space
Windows Vista users:
PC must be Windows Vista Premium Ready

IMPORTANT! Software must be installed first!

Software Installation
1.

Close all running applications on the host PC.

2.

Remove previous version drivers, if present. You can do this through Microsoft’s Add/Remove Programs
feature.

3.

Insert the Data Acquisition CD (8.1.2 or higher) into your CD-ROM drive and wait for the PC to auto-run. An
Opening Screen will appear. If AutoRun is disabled: (a) right click Windows Start menu, (b) select Explore; and(c) double-click MasterSetup.exe. As an alternative to using the CD, you can download software from:www.mccdaq.com/products/software.aspx.

4.

Click the <ENTER SETUP> button.
Note: If you are downloading software from our website, follow instructions provided there.

5.

From the hardware selection screen, select your data acquisition device then follow the on-screen instructions.

Note: To enable all LogView features:(a) From LogView’s main window, open the File pull-down menu,(b) select Authorization,(c) enter ED7B55484273 in the dialog box and apply the code.

LogBook/360 combines the features and capabilities of LogBook/300 with a DBK60 expansion chassis. The lower
portion of the front panel has three male DB37 connectors (P1, P2, and P3) for system expansion, and a post forconnecting to CHASSIS ground. The upper section is nearly identical to LogBook/300.

LogBook/360, Front Panel

LogBook/360 Quick Start Guide

QS360-1

Reference Notes:
Depending on the nature of your LogBook system, you may find one or more of the following references to the
LogBook User’s Manual PDF helpful. The PDF manual is included on the Data Acquisition CD and is alsoavailable on our web-site.
ooooFor block diagrams and operational overviews, refer to Chapter 1 of the LogBook User’s Manual PDF.
For system expansion and calculating system power, refer to Ch. 4 and to the DBK Basics section.
For information regarding LBK options, refer to Chapter 5.
For specific DBK card information, refer to the DBK Options Manual PDF.
Note: The LogBook/360 rear panel supports three termination panels. Many different combinations are
possible.

WARNING
Electric shock hazard. Turn off power to all system-connected devices prior to connecting or
disconnecting cables, or setting hardware configurations. Failure to do so could result in electric shockor death, and equipment damage, even under low-voltage conditions.

CAUTIONUse ESD tools, containers, and procedures during setup of DBK cards. Electrostatic
discharge can damage some components. To prevent pin damage, align DBK cards with the
backplane DB37 connectors, then gently press them together.
When using LogBook in attached mode, the PC-Card [in LogBook] must already have the filelogbook.sys. Otherwise, LogView cannot communicate with LogBook, and LogBook willappear dead.

QS360-2

LogBook/360 Quick Start Guide

Setting Up the Card Drawer
LogBook/360 can house three DBK cards internally, and make use of various termination panels. For user convenience, a card
drawer can be slid free of the device. The following steps should be used when adding, removing, or changing cards. Refer tothe following figure as needed.
1 – Turn off system power and disconnect LogBook/360.
Turn power off to the LogBook/360 and all connected devices. Disconnect LogBook/360 from the system.
2 – Remove top cover.
If you need to make any change on the LogBook motherboard, you will need to remove the top cover. Otherwise, the cover
can remain in place. To remove the top cover, simply remove the two top cover screws and slide the cover free of thedevice.
3 – Remove card drawer.
A.
Remove the two screws that hold the card drawer to the chassis.
B.
Loosen the three termination panel thumbscrews.
C.
Carefully pull the card drawer free of the chassis.
4 – Remove termination panels.
For each termination panel, remove the two screws that mount it to the card drawer, then remove the termination panel.
5 – Determine power requirements.
Depending on the power needs of your system’s DBK cards, you may need to add a power card.
Refer to the DBK Basics section of the LogBook User’s Manual PDF in regard to calculating yoursystem’s power requirement.
If the required power is more than the available power your system will require auxiliary power. One of two power
supply cards can be used with LogBook/360:
DBK32A – This DBK supplies ±15 V for use with a LogBook, DaqBook, or DaqBoard.
DBK33 – This DBK supplies +5 V and ±15 Vfor use with Log Book, DaqBook, DaqBoard,or Daq PC-Card.

Leave jumpers JP1 and JP2 in place unless a DBK33 is being used. If a DBK33 is being
used configure the P1 interconnect board according to the table presented in step 6.

LogBook/360 Quick Start Guide

QS360-3

6 - FOR DBK33 USERS ONLY! Configure the P1 interconnect board for power source.
This step only applies when a DBK33 is being used with the system.
If you are not using a DBK33 skip to step 7.
The schematic to the right shows the LogBook/360 jumpers, JP1 andJP2, which are used to distribute the LogBook’s +5V power supply.
DBK cards that attach to the LogBook’s P1 bus need +5V, +15V, and-15V power sources to operate. Typically, the LogBook’s power supply
meets this requirement, but if additional power is needed, a DBK32A or
DBK33 must be added.
The LogBook’s power supply employs diode protection on its +/-15V
supplies so that no conflict will take place when a DBK32A or DBK33 isadded to the P1 bus. However, adding a DBK33, with its +5V source,
necessitates the proper positioning of the JP1 and JP2 jumpers.
Adding a DBK33 to your system with the jumpers set incorrectly candamage your LogBook, DBK33, and other system components. Refer tothe following table for important information regarding configuration.

CAUTION
Adding a DBK33, with its +5V source, necessitates the proper positioning of the JP1 and JP2
jumpers on the LogBook/360 P1 interconnect board. Adding a DBK33 to your system with thejumpers set incorrectly can damage the LogBook, DBK33, and other system components.
WHEN JP1 AND JP2 JUMPERS ARE IN PLACE A DBK33 CANNOT BE USED IN THE
SYSTEM!

P1 Interconnect Board Configurations for DBK33 Applications
LogBook +5V Power Source
Internal P1
External P1
Bus
Bus

Notes Pertaining to DBK33

Out

Yes

No

When the JP1 jumper is in place and the JP2
jumper is out, if the system is using external
DBKs the DBK33 will need to be external.
Internal DBKs will be powered from
LogBook’s internal P1 bus.

Out

In

No

No

When the JP1 jumper is out and the JP2
jumper is in place, if DBKs are usedinternally or externally, the DBK33 can beinternal or external and will power bothinternal and external DBK cards.

Out

Out

No

No

When the JP1 and JP2 jumpers are both out,
the following apply:

JP1

JP2

In

P1 Interconnect
Board*o If using internal DBKs, you will need touse an internal DBK33.
o If using external DBKs, you will need touse an external DBK33.
* Refer to the LogBook/360 Hardware Setup figure on page QS360-3 for the P1 interconnect board’s location.
Leave jumpers JP1 and JP2 in place, unless a DBK33 is being used. If a DBK33 is being
used configure the P1 interconnect board according to the above table.

QS360-4

LogBook/360 Quick Start Guide7 – Install power card if necessary.
If you determined in step 5 that additional power was needed, add a DBK32A or DBK33 power card to thechassis. The DBK Option Cards & Modules User’s Manual includes detailed information regarding thesepower-related cards.
A. Carefully align the power card’s DB37 connector with a DB37 connector on the interconnect board andgently press them together.
B. Mount the power card with two screws into the standoffs on the card drawer.
8 – Configure DBK cards.
Configure unique channel addresses with the jumpers on the DBK cards. Some cards have other jumpers and/or
DIP switches. Refer to the specific DBK sections of the DBK Options Manual (p/n 457-0905) as needed.
9 – Install DBK cards.
You must use all analog DBK cards in the LogBook/360; unless you have a factory modification that allows theuse of all digital cards. You can not use both analog and digital cards at the same time.
A. Carefully align the DBK card’s DB37 connector with a DB37 connector on the interconnect board andgently press them together (see figure).
B. Mount the DBK card with two screws into the standoffs on the card drawer (see previous figure).
C. Continue installation of any remaining DBK cards.
10 – Connect internal signals.
Connect signal inputs from DBK cards to termination panels. DBK cards connect to the termination panels invarious ways (see figure and particular DBK sections in the DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual):
Single-ended connections use analog common.
Differential connections require the proper polarity, typically red-to-red for high (+)
and black-to-black for low (-).
For thermocouples, red is generally the low side. Always make sure the T/C connector and wire typematch the T/C type used.

11 – Install termination panels.
Mount the termination panels to the card drawer with two screws for each panel.
12 – Install card drawer.
The card drawer slides into the bottom track of the chassis.
A. Hold the card drawer by its handle and tilt it up slightly. Place it on the bottom track of the chassis.
B. Carefully slide the card drawer into the chassis. When it engages the bottom track, level the card drawer andcontinue inserting it until it engages with the P1 interconnect board.
C. Tighten the three captive thumbscrews holding the termination panels to the chassis.
D. Install the two screws holding the card drawer to the chassis.
13 – Connect external signals.
Connect signal inputs from sensors to termination panels.
14 – Install top cover.
If the top cover was removed, slide it back into place and secure with two screws.

LogBook/360 Quick Start Guide

QS360-5

Connecting the LogBook/360 to the PC, External DBKs, and to PowerThe following hardware-connection figure and procedure are generic; details vary with system complexity. For“unattached mode,” a pre-configured PC-Card is inserted in the PC-Card slot, and no connection to a PC is made.
The following figure illustrates the “attached” mode.
Note: Connecting LogBook/360 to a PC applies to the “attached mode” only. Many applications will make use of
three internal DBK cards only, having no need to attach external DBK cards or modules as discussed in thefollowing text.
Step 4

Connect the LogBook’s DIN5 power in connector to the AC adapter
and connect the adapter to a suitable power outlet. Note that otherpower options are discussed in the DBK Basics section of thismanual.

LogBook/360 System, “Attached Mode,” Basic Connections
Note: Rear panel connections may be made via terminal blocks, as discussed in the previous section,
Card Drawer Setup.

After verifying that all equipment power is off, hardware connection typically proceeds as follows.
Refer to the above figure as needed.
1.

QS360-6

Connect the LogBook/360 to the host PC. There are four ways for LogBook/360 to communicate
with the PC. These are: parallel port, serial port to serial port, serial port to USB, and manualtransportation of the PC-Card. Note that the parallel port method is represented in the previous
figure.
a)Parallel port to parallel port – If using the parallel port, connect a DB25male to DB25female parallel
cable [e.g., CA-35-2 or CA-35-6 (2ft. or 6ft. respectively)] to PARALLEL PORT on LogBook/360, and tothe corresponding parallel port on the host PC. When this method is used, the PC must be set to the ECP
mode. See ECP Parallel Port, page QS360-9 for additional information.

b)

Serial port to serial port – If using the serial port, use a null modem serial cable (CA-47) to connect the
DB9 SERIAL PORT on LogBook/360 to the corresponding DB9 serial port on the host PC.

LogBook/360 Quick Start Guidec)

Serial port to USB port - Requires an adapter kit. To connect the LogBook to a USB port you will need a
RS-232 to USB Interface Adapter Kit p/n CA-232-USB-KIT (available from Measurement Computing).
Refer to the associated Quick Start document (QS RS-232_to_USB_Interface.pdf) for a list of the kit’s contentsd)and for RS-232 to USB conversion instructions. The pdf is included on Data Acquisition CD (rev 8.1.2 andhigher).
PC-Card – With PC-Card communication, LogBook/360 does not require a connection to the computer, as
communication is accomplished via the PC-Card. To provide the PC-Card with the correct configuration
file, it must be configured from the PC, through LogView. After the PC-Card is configured, it is inserted
into LogBook’s PC-Card slot, located behind the front panel door.
Reference Note:
Information pertaining to PC-Cards can be found in chapter 1 and in the LogView section of the
LogBook User’s Manual PDF.

2.

Connect LogBook/360 to the DBK cards and modules. For connecting internal DBK cards, refer tothe earlier section entitled, Setting Up the Card Drawer.
Most analog DBKs connect to P1; digital DBKs generally connect to P2. Refer to the DBK Options
Manual (457-0905) in regard to your particular DBKs and for general DBK installation details.
The CA-37-x cable can daisy-chain several DBKs including the DBK41, which has a built-in
P1 bus connection for 10 DBK cards. The x in the cable part number refers to the number of devices
that can be connected (a CA-37-1 actually has two DB-37 connectors).
Note: Chapter 4 of the LogBook User’s Manual PDF includes pinouts for LogBook/360’s P1, P2,
and P3 connectors.

CAUTION
For analog signal inputs via P1, do not exceed -35 VDC or +45 VDC.
Exceeding these limits could result in equipment damage.
3.

Connect DBK(s) to transducer(s). Follow instructions for particular DBK as described in the
DBK Option Cards & Modules User’s Manual and for the particular transducer. Some DBKs canaccommodate both BNC and screw-terminal connections.

4.

Connect LogBook/360 to a suitable power source, such as
the included AC-to-DC adapter or optional DBK34A
UPS / Battery Module. DC power sources such as a carbatteries must supply 10 to 45 VDC and use the correct
DIN5 pinout (see figure). A locking DIN5 connector
assures a secure power connection for applications subject
to vibration and thermal stress.

DIN5 Power Input Connector(As seen on LogBook/360 Front Panel)

Hardware Configuration
Reference Notes:
Refer to the device-specific sections of the LBK options chapter [in the user’s manual PDF]
and the DBK Option Cards & Modules User’s Manual PDF for information regarding thesedevices. Note that certain DBK options require manual configuration.
LogBook/360's top cover does not need to be removed, except to add or remove an LBK option, or to
replace the fuse.
Most LogBook/360 configuration is done via software as described in section, LogBook/360 Device
Configuration. LogBook/360 configuration does not require the setting of jumpers or switches, unlessthe RS-485 communication option is being used.

LogBook/360 Quick Start Guide

QS360-7

LogBook/360 Device Configuration
A configuration utility is supplied via a control panel applet. The LogBook Configuration applet allows
you to add a device, remove a device, or change existing configuration settings. From this same window,
you can also access a built-in utility to test the connected device for current setup and performance.
LogBook Configuration can be found in the Windows Control Panel. The Control Panel can be navigatedto from Window’s desktop Start button as follows:
Start

Settings

Control Panel

You can enter LogBook Configuration during driver installation or whenever you wish to add, remove orchange device configuration settings. The following description applies to either method.
The first configuration window will display configured devices in the Device Inventory field based on theport they’re connected to. Devices are represented by an icon, and text, e.g., LogBook (LPT1), as can beseen in the following figure. If no devices are configured, the device inventory field will remain blank. The
figure shows the first and second configuration windows overlapped.

LogBook Configuration Windows
The four buttons across the bottom of the first configuration window (previous figure) are used as follows:
Properties. Configuration settings for a device can be changed or modified from the corresponding properties
window. To do so, double-click the device icon or single-click the device and then single-click the Properties
button. The second configuration window will appear for the selected device as shown in the previous figure.
Add Device. The Add Device button is used to add a device configuration whenever a new device is added tothe system. LogView cannot recognize a device unless listed in the configuration window.
Remove. The Remove button is used to remove a device from the configuration. A device may be removed if it
is no longer installed or if the device’s configuration no longer applies.
Close. The Close button may be used at any time to exit the LogBook Configuration applet.

The second configuration window displays the properties for the selected LogBook. Fields include:
Device Name is displayed with the default name, numbered successively as configured. This field can bechanged to any descriptive name as desired.
Connection Type can be serial or parallel port.
Device Connection specifies the port name.
Protocol is used to set the parallel port protocol (ECP only) or serial protocol (RS-232 or RS-485).
Device Timeout specifies the number of seconds LogView will be wait for a LogBook response before
displaying an error condition.
QS360-8

LogBook/360 Quick Start Guide

ECP Parallel Port
To use parallel port communication with an attached LogBook/360, your PC must
support the ECP protocol AND be set in the ECP mode.
PCs made since 1994 probably support the Enhanced Computer Port protocol (ECP). If your parallel port
does not support ECP, you can communicate with the LogBook/360 via the RS-232 serial port, or you can
add an ECP-compatible ISA board or PC-Card parallel port. Setting the PC to ECP mode varies withdifferent computers. On some computers, you can enter the BIOS Setup utility from Windows Settings orduring startup by pressing the F1 function key. The Parallel Port Mode property can be found under the
Peripheral Configuration group menu item. If necessary, consult your PC’s documentation or your PC’s
manufacturer.
To ensure ECP compatibility after proper setup, use the Test Hardware utility(described on page QS360-10). Before testing, make sure LogBook/360 is properly
connected, powered on, and that the Parallel Port Mode is set to ECP (in BIOS Setup).

CAUTION
Making errors in BIOS Setup can disrupt your system’s operation. If test hardware
indicates a problem and you have inadequate experience with the BIOS Setup utility,
consult your System Administrator or other qualified individual.

Serial Port
If the selected device is connected to a serial port the properties window will include the fields shown in the
figure at right. Baud rate can be set from 1200 to 115200 bits per second (default 9600). When all fields
have been changed to the desired settings, you can click on one of the following options:
Apply to store the device configuration. Parameters are not locked in until you click the Apply
button. If you make changes and don’t click Apply, clicking the Test button in Test Hardware will
yield unexpected errors.
OK to store the configuration and exit the current property screen.
Cancel to exit the current screen without storing any changes.
Test Hardware to test the current device.

LogBook Properties Tab

LogBook/360 Quick Start Guide

Test Hardware Tab

QS360-9Testing the Hardware
Before testing LogBook/360:a) Verify the device has been properly installed.
b) Make sure the communication cable (serial or parallel) is firmly in place to the proper ports.
c) Verify the device is powered-on.
Testing the LogBook/360 device might cause the system to hang. If test results are notdisplayed within 30 seconds, or if the system does not respond properly do the following:
Reboot the system.
Upon power-up, re-enter the LogBook Configuration.
Ensure the configuration settings are correct. Change the settings as applicable.
To begin the test, click the Test button. Test results should be displayed within a few seconds.
Test results indicate if the device is online (properly connected, powered on and ready to transfer the data)
or offline. If the device is online, Performance Test will display Download and Upload speed rates. These
rates represent the maximum speed at which downloading and uploading files can be performed. Actual
transfer time will depend on channel configuration and the size of the transfer.

Acquisition Configuration
An acquisition is configured using LogView on a PC and then stored as an acquisition setup file on a
PC-Card. The PC-Card may be in an attached LogBook/360 or in the PC to be later manually transferred toan unattached LogBook/360. The system’s DBK cards are listed; the scan sequence is defined; the trigger
conditions are specified, etc.
Reference Note:
Configuring the acquisition is described in the LogView section of the user’s manual PDF.

QS360-10

LogBook/360 Quick Start Guide

A Note about Calibration
Calibration is typically performed automatically through LogView software; however, some DBKs may
require manual calibration. LogView’s 2-point calibration fine-tunes the reading’s slope and offset error(mx+b). DBKs working with non-linear sensors typically condition/convert the reading to a linear form.
Otherwise, a non-linear analog input signal is difficult to read accurately. Careful use of the calculatedchannels may yield usable approximations in simple, limited-range conditions.

Reference Notes:
An example of 2-point calibration is provided under the Procedures heading in the
LogView section of the user’s manual PDF.
For information on calibrating the DBK16 and the DBK43A, refer to the
DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual PDF.

LogBook/360 Quick Start Guide

QS360-11

System Expansion

4

Expansion and Enhancement Options….. 4-1
What are LBK Options?……4-1
What are DBK Options?……4-2
Power Options …… 4-3
Other Options ……4-3

Considerations……4-4
DBK Configuration …… 4--4
Dimensional and Environmental Factors……4-4
Mechanical Setup Options……4-5

P1, P2, and P3 Port Connectors……4-6
Reference Notes:• Power Supplies, Power Connectors, and Calculating Power Needs are topics that are discussed in the
DBK Basics section, which immediately follows this chapter.
• The chapter entitled, LBK and other non-DBK Options, discusses several non-DBK related options thatcan be used with LogBook. These include COM/422/485, memory expansion, LBK1 remote terminal,
LBK2 Digital-to-Analog Output, and remote On/Off switch/LED indicator options.
• The DBK Option Cards & Modules User’s Manual (p/n 457-0905), details optional DBK cards andmodules and addresses DBK power issues. As a part of product support, the manual is automaticallyloaded onto your hard drive during software installation. The default location is the Programs group,
which can be accessed throught the Windows desktop.

Expansion and Enhancement Options
A variety of cards and modules can be used to expand and enhance LogBook systems. These options arefound in three categories, LBK options, DBK options, and other. In addition to being discussed briefly
below, LBK options are detailed in the following chapter, and DBK options are detailed in the
DBK Option Cards & Modules User’s Manual (p/n 457-0901). The “other” options are detailed in thischapter.

What are LBK Options?
LBK options are LogBook add-on features that can be used to enhance your system. The LBK options
described briefly below, and are detailed in the following chapter.
LBK/COM/422/485, RS-232 Board with an RS-422/485 Option. The standard LogBook
communications board supports RS-232 only. However, the LogBook can be purchased with theadditional capability for RS-422 and RS-485. These optional boards (p/n LBK/COM/422/485) havecircuitry for all three communication protocols.
LBKMEM1 or LBKMEM1U, 16 MB DRAM Memory Expansion. The standard 4-MB RAM can beuser-replaced with a 16 MB board (LBK/MEM1-U). The expanded memory creates a larger data buffer,
allowing more time to swap PC-Cards. This is convenient when using fast scan rates. Note that the 16 MB
memory option can also be installed at the factory (LBK/MEM1).
LBK1, Remote Terminal with LCD Screen. LBK1 provides a keypad to control the system’s basic
operation when no PC is attached and a LCD screen for viewing system status. A special rack (p/nMount1) is available to attach the LBK1 to the top of LogBook. For applications in harsh environments, a
special enclosure can be used to shield the unit from water and thermal stress.

LogBook User’s Manual

957096

System Expansion 4-1

LBK2, 4-channel Digital-to-Analog Output card. The LBK2 Digital-to-Analog output board contains
four 16-bit, voltage-output, digital-to-analog converters with a maximum update rate of 100 kHz perchannel. The board is intended for waveform generation, UUT (Unit Under Test) stimulus, and signal
feedback. Each converter has a fixed, full-scale output of ±10 VDC. The board’s operation must be
programmed through LogView.

What are DBK Options?
DBK option cards and modules exist for signal-conditioning, analog output, system I/O, auxiliary power,
and expansion. Various sensor types are accommodated, including high-voltage/current, strain gages,
thermocouples, isolation, relays, accelerometers, filtering, and simultaneous sample and hold.
Reference Notes:• For a general introduction to DBKs, refer to the DBK Basics section of thismanual. The text discusses the various categories of DBKs, connectivity issues,
tips on setting up a data acquisition system, and power considerations.
• DBK options are detailed in DBK Option Cards & Modules User’s Manual(p/n 457-0905). As a part of product support, the manual is automatically loaded
onto your hard drive during software installation. The default location is thePrograms group, which can be accessed throught the Windows desktop.
No matter what the signal input from the transducer, DBKs produce output signals suitable for analog-todigital conversion (ADC). The output signals can be bipolar (typically -5 to +5 V) or unipolar (typically
0 to 10 V). The user can select a range of relevant values to correspond to the lowest and highest signal—
this range selection guarantees the highest resolution in 16-bit conversion by the ADC.
Note: DBKs vary in their outputs and gain settings. Refer to the specifications for the particular DBK
used.
Basic Connection Concepts
Most system expansions stem from the 37-pin Signal I/O ports P1, P2, and P3. Note that LogBook/360
combines the features and capabilities of LogBook/300 with those of a DBK60 expansion chassis. In
addition, LogBook/360 has a pre-installed serial communications card that provides GPS and AUX serial
ports as detailed in the chapter entitled, LBK and other non-DBK Options.
•P1. Each of 16 main (base) channels can support up to 16 sub-channels and thereby provide
expansion up to 256 analog input channels. LogBook’s channel sequencer scans expansion channels
at the same high speed as the base channels. DBKs can be daisy-chained off the P1 connector of
LogBook or an expansion module. Some DBKs add another level of multiplexing andprogrammable gain to each channel, and setting channel parameters properly sometimes requires
both hardware and software setup.

•

P2. The Digital I/O port can accommodate the DBK20/21 (digital I/O cards), DBK23/24 (isolated
digital input/output chassis), DBK25 (8-channel relay card), and other compatible devices; up to
208 digital I/O lines.

•

P3. The Pulse Frequency port can be used for analog output and other uses. A DBK11A provides
for easy signal connection via screw terminals or optional BNC connectors.

The following figure illustrates various expansion possibilities. Note that additional options exist.
DBK options are detailed in the DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual (p/n 457-0905).

4-2

System Expansion

957096

LogBook User’s ManualA Few Possible Expansion Configurations
Note 1: LogBook/360 (not shown) combines the features and capabilities of LogBook/300 with those of a DBK60.
In addition, LogBook/360 has two additional serial ports.

Power Options
Power options are covered in the DBK Basics section, which immediately follows this chapter.

Other Options
LogBook/GPS, Global Positioning System & Serial Device Data Collection Support, LogBook/360
Only. This software-enabled option provides a means to collect serial data from various devices, convert itto channel values, and store it synchronously with the devices analog and digital inputs. Virtually any
serial device that sources continuous ASCII data, including Global Positioning System (GPS) devices, gas
flow meters, and scales, is compatible. GPS devices conforming to the NMEA 0183 standard aresupported directly in the LogView interface, so no knowledge of the data format is necessary.
Note: The LogBook/GPS option is enabled from the Authorization dialog box, selected from LogView’s
File pull-down menu. Details are provided in chapter 6. Use the code shown below:
USE THIS CODE TO ENABLE COMPLETE LOGVIEW FUNCTIONALITY: ED7B55484273
LogBook/Modem, Modem and Upload Scheduler Software Support. With this software-enabled
option, a modem-connected PC can communicate with LogBook virtually anywhere in the world. Any
Hayes-compatible modem can be attached to the LogBook’s serial port. Both standard desktop andwireless modems are supported. The Upload Scheduler is an independent application that allows the user
to configure upload events on one or more LogBooks. To avoid waiting for a lengthy upload to complete,
the Scheduler can be configured to perform the upload during unattended off-hours. For example, three
upload events could be configured in the Scheduler, each for an upload of data at different hours. The
Upload Scheduler can save valuable time by performing unattended uploads; especially in cases wheremodem-connected LogBooks are operating at slow baud rates.
Note: The LogBook/Modem option is enabled from the Authorization dialog box, selected from
LogView’s File pull-down menu. Details are provided in chapter 7. Use the above code.

LogBook User’s Manual

957096

System Expansion 4-3

Remote On/Off Switch and LED Indicator Options. If LogBook’s female DB9 TERMINAL connector
is not being used for the LBK1 remote terminal or another device, it can be used to connect a remote on/off
switch and/or indicator LED. The following chapter provides the information needed to add any one of thefollowing three remote options:• Remote On/Off Switch and LED• Remote On/Off Switch (no LED)
• Remote LED Indicator (no remote switch)

Considerations
DBK Configuration
The DBKs are usually configured before the connections are made and power is applied. This order of
installation can prevent equipment damage and help ensure proper operation on startup.
Many DBKs have on-board jumpers and/or DIP switches used for setting channels and other variables.
These settings are discussed in the individual DBK sections of the DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s
Manual (p/n 457-0905), which is installed on the PC’s hard drive as a part of product support. The default
location is the Programs directory, accessible via the Windows Desktop.
For systems with many modules, stacking units together helps conserve space and assure easy cable runs.
Such stacking is typically accomplished with the use of a splice kit. The kit is shipped as part of the
package for several DBK modules. The splice plate kits include metal plates (fastener panels) that screw
onto the sides of a module. A vertical rack of several modules can be assembled. An optional handle isavailable for portable use, for example, when using two stacked modules.
Prior to expanding your LogBook system you should review the following DBK Basics section of themanual, with special attention to the section entitled, Tips on Setting up a Data Acquisition System. Prior
planning will go a long way towards optimizing your acquisition setup and will most likely save you time.

Dimensional and Environmental Factors
Before setting up your LogBook-based acquisition system, you should consider the following size andenvironmental related factors.
LogBook/300 Dimensions: 8½ × 11 × 1-3/4 in. (216 × 279 × 44 mm). This enclosure has the same
footprint as the DBK modules for easy stacking of units.
LogBook/360 Dimensions: 14 × 11 × 3-7/16 in. (330 × 279 × 84 mm). The width (11”) provides forconvenient stacking of DBK modules.
Operating temperature/humidity: -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C) @ 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
Operation of the unit in environments exceeding these limits requires that a temperature-regulated
enclosure).
Storage temperature: -40° to 176°F (-40° to 80°C). The standard case is rugged but not designed for
immersion. Special enclosures are available for harsh environments.
All connectors, including the power connector, are locking. The D-sub connectors have thumbscrews andthe DIN5 power connector has a twist-lock ring to ensure solid connections are maintained.

4-4

System Expansion

957096

LogBook User’s ManualMechanical Setup Options
DBK modules for packaging DBK expansion cards are available with three slots (DBK10, DBK60) or
10 slots (DBK41). The best option depends on the number of DBK cards in your system. For three or
fewer cards, you can use the stackable 3-slot DBK10, or 3-slot DBK60.
Note: DBK60 has several termination-panel options, e.g., BNC, Safety-jack, T/C, removable blockscrew-terminal, slotted, and DB37-style.
For more than six cards, use the 10-slot DBK41. Several DBK41s can be daisy-chained to handle a large
number of DBKs in a system. Another packaging option is the use of special enclosures for harshenvironments. These enclosures can be locked to prevent tampering, conditioned for heat and/or cold, andsealed air- or water-tight. For systems with many modules, stacking units together helps conserve space
and assure easy cable runs. Such stacking can be accomplished with adhesive dual-lock tabs or by the useof fastener-panels (splice plates). The splice-plate method provides for a more rigid stacking, and is thepreferred method. Dual-lock tabs are convenient for mounting a Notebook PC to a LogBook or DBK
module.
•Dual-lock tabs. Adhesive dual-lock tabs are typicallyused to attach a notebook PC to a LogBook or to a DBK
module.

•Fastener panels. Optional splice plate kits can be used toprovide rigid stacking. These kits include metal plates thatform a vertical rack of two or more modules. This method
allows the “enclosure” to size itself as needed. A handle
can be attached for convenience.

LogBook User’s Manual

957096

System Expansion 4-5

P1, P2, and P3 Port Connectors
LogBooks have three port connectors: P1, P2, and P3. For LogBook/300, these connectors are located on
the rear panel. For LogBook/360, they are on the front panel as discussed in the following note.
Connector pinouts begin on the next page.
Note: LogBook/360 actually has two sets of P1, P2, and P3 connectors, one internal set located on themotherboard, and one external set located on the unit’s front panel. LogBook/360’s front panel P1,
P2, and P3 connectors connect to the motherboard’s P1, P2, and P3 via ribbon cables.
P1 (Analog Input)
LogBook’s P1 connector is compatible with all DBK options. Features and capabilities of P1 signals
include:• High-performance signal connection for: ±10 V and 0-20 V input ranges, gains from ×1 to ×64 (eachgain and range calibrated individually), and an input stage with low crosstalk, high dynamic
impedance, small signal injection.
• All calibration is performed digitally; there are no pots to adjust.
• The sequencer depth (the number of channel readings in a scan) is 1024 analog channels and 128
digital channels.
• P1 includes an enhanced DBK-50 protocol that allows DBK cards or modules to identify themselvesand carry their own calibration data. These same connections provide for complete configuration of
DBK cards with that capability, while not requiring the use of jumpers.

CAUTION
For analog signal inputs via P1, do not exceed -35 VDC or +45 VDC or
equipment damage may result.

P2 (Digital I/O)
P2 is used with various kinds of digital I/O. For autonomous operation without an attached PC, the P2
outputs may be preset before the acquisition. The P2 digital outputs may be used as alarm outputs to
identify the detection of specified levels in the acquired data.
P3 (Pulse Frequency, High-Speed Digital I/O)
Features and capabilities of P3 signals include:• Four 16-bit pulse counter channels that can be scanned along with analog inputs• Additional digital I/O control lines for high-speed digital input and output.
• Four optional, internal, 16-bit ±10 V analog output channels (LBK2), useable for waveform orcontrol output, or additional control lines for external analog output expansion.
The 16 high-speed digital I/O lines, along with the additional digital I/O control lines can now be used forreal-time digital peripherals such as expanded digital input, or current or voltage DACs.
Optional, internal four-channel 16-bit waveform/control ±10 V DACs on P3:• Initially setup to a static, preprogrammed voltage at the beginning of the acquisition.
• In the future, may be used for waveform or control outputs.
P1, P2, and P3 Pinout Tables
You can connect signals to LogBook’s P1, P2, and P3 port connectors using a CA-37-x cable(via a D-shell 37-pin female connector), or a DBK11 screw-terminal card with component sockets.
This page and the next two contain P1, P2, and P3 pinouts.

4-6

System Expansion

957096

LogBook User’s ManualP1 – Analog I/O

Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

Signal Name
+5 PWR-15 VDC with diode
CHS 3
CHS 1
GS 1
GS 0
POWER GND
NEGREF (-5 V)
POSREF (+5 V)
N/C
CH 7 LO IN/CH 15 HI IN
CH 6 LO IN/CH 14 HI IN
CH 5 LO IN/CH 13 HI IN
CH 4 LO IN/CH 12 HI IN
CH 3 LO IN/CH 11 HI IN
CH 2 LO IN/CH 10 HI IN
CH 1 LO IN/CH 9 HI IN
CH 0 LO IN/CH 8 HI IN
L.L. GNDPCRCLK+15 VDC with diode
CHS 2
CHS 0
DIG IN 1
DIG IN 0
SSH
CAL24
L.L. GND
L.L. GND
CH 7 HI IN
CH 6 HI IN
CH 5 HI IN
CH 4 HI IN
CH 3 HI IN
CH 2 HI IN
CH 1 HI IN
CH 0 HI IN

LogBook User’s Manual

Description for P1 Pin Use+5 V supply @ 0.100 A-15 V supply @ 0.150 A
Channel select line for expansion cards
Channel select line for expansion cards
Gain select line for expansion cards
Gain select line for expansion cards
Digital ground-5.0000 VDC @ 0.005 A reference used for various DBKs
+5.0000 VDC @ 0.005 A reference used for calibration with optional 4-channel D/A board
No Connection
Ch 7 LO IN (differential mode)/ch 15 HI IN (single-ended mode)
Ch 6 LO IN (differential mode)/ch 14 HI IN (single-ended mode)
Ch 5 LO IN (differential mode)/ch 13 HI IN (single-ended mode)
Ch 4 LO IN (differential mode)/ch 12 HI IN (single-ended mode)
Ch 3 LO IN (differential mode)/ch 11 HI IN (single-ended mode)
Ch 2 LO IN (differential mode)/ch 10 HI IN (single-ended mode)
Ch 1 LO IN (differential mode)/ch 9 HI IN(single-ended mode)
Ch 0 LO IN (differential mode)/ch 8 HI IN (single-ended mode)
Low-level ground (analog ground - use with analog inputs and outputs)
Pacer clock output/input+15 V supply @ 0.150 A
Channel select line for expansion cards
Channel select line for expansion cards
Digital input bit 1
External TTL trigger input
Simultaneous Sample and Hold Output
Calibration output (+24 V @ 0.010 A)
Low-level ground (analog ground - use with analog inputs and outputs)
Low-level ground (analog ground - use with analog inputs and outputs)
Ch 7 HI IN (single-ended mode or differential mode)
Ch 6 HI IN (single-ended mode or differential mode)
Ch 5 HI IN (single-ended mode or differential mode)
Ch 4 HI IN (single-ended mode or differential mode)
Ch 3 HI IN (single-ended mode or differential mode)
Ch 2 HI IN (single-ended mode or differential mode)
Ch 1 HI IN (single-ended mode or differential mode)
Ch 0 HI IN (single-ended mode or differential mode)

957096

System Expansion 4-7

P2 Digital I/O

Pin
Signal Name
Description for P2 Pin Use
1
IR INPUTInterrupt line input (no functions to access this)2
IR ENABLE
Interrupt line enable (no functions to access this)3
PORT B 7
Digital input/output – port B bit 7
4
PORT B 6
Digital input/output – port B bit 6
5
PORT B 5
Digital input/output – port B bit 5
6
PORT B 4
Digital input/output – port B bit 4
7
PORT B 3
Digital input/output – port B bit 3
8
PORT B 2
Digital input/output – port B bit 2
9
PORT B 1
Digital input/output – port B bit 1
10
PORT B 0
Digital input/output – port B bit 011
GND
Digital ground12
N/C
Pin not connected/not used
13
GND
Digital ground
14
N/C
Pin not connected/not used
15
GND
Digital ground16
N/C
Pin not connected/not used
17
GND
Digital ground18+5 V+5 V supply @ 0.100 A
19
GND
Digital ground20+5 V+5 V supply @ 0.100 A
21
GND
Digital ground
22
PORT C 7
Digital input/output – port C bit 7
23
PORT C 6
Digital input/output – port C bit 6
24
PORT C 5
Digital input/output – port C bit 5
25
PORT C 4
Digital input/output – port C bit 4
26
PORT C 3
Digital input/output – port C bit 3
27
PORT C 2
Digital input/output – port C bit 2
28
PORT C 1
Digital input/output – port C bit 1
29
PORT C 0
Digital input/output – port C bit 030
PORT A 7
Digital input/output – port A bit 7
31
PORT A 6
Digital input/output – port A bit 6
32
PORT A 5
Digital input/output – port A bit 5
33
PORT A 4
Digital input/output – port A bit 4
34
PORT A 3
Digital input/output – port A bit 3
35
PORT A 2
Digital input/output – port A bit 2
36
PORT A 1
Digital input/output – port A bit 1
37
PORT A 0
Digital input/output – port A bit 0
Note: No local lines are available if digital expansion cards are in use.

4-8

System Expansion

957096

LogBook User’s Manual

P3 - Pulse Frequency/High-Speed Digital I/O

Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

Signal Name
IR INPUTIR ENABLE
HSD 7
HSD 6
HSD 5
HSD 4
HSD 3
HSD 2
HSD 1
HSD 0
GND
C/DWRRDTMR 0 OUT
TMR 1 OUT
CNT 2 IN
CNT 0 IN
+15 VDC+5 V
N/C
HSD 15HSD 14HSD 13
HSD 12
HSD 11
HSD 10
HSD 9
HSD 8
AGND
AOUT0 / Scan
AOUT1 / Trigger
AOUT2 / Clock
AOUT3 / DigOut
CNT 3 IN
CNT 1 IN
-15 VDC

LogBook User’s Manual

Description for P3 Pin Use
Interrupt line inputInterrupt line enable
High-speed digital I/O bit 7 (low byte)
High-speed digital I/O bit 6 (low byte)
High-speed digital I/O bit 5 (low byte)
High-speed digital I/O bit 4 (low byte)
High-speed digital I/O bit 3 (low byte)
High-speed digital I/O bit 2 (low byte)
High-speed digital I/O bit 1 (low byte)
High-speed digital I/O bit 0 (low byte)
Digital ground

Timer 0 output
Timer 1 output
Counter 2 input
Counter 0 input+15 V supply @ 0.050 A+5 V supply @ 0.100 A
Pin not connected/not used
High-speed digital I/O bit 15 (high byte)
High-speed digital I/O bit 14 (high byte)
High-speed digital I/O bit 13 (high byte)
High-speed digital I/O bit 12 (high byte)
High-speed digital I/O bit 11 (high byte)
High-speed digital I/O bit 10 (high byte)
High-speed digital I/O bit 9 (high byte)
High-speed digital I/O bit 8 (high byte)
Analog ground
Analog output 0, optional LBK2: 16-bit, 100 kHz, ±10 VDC DAC
Analog output 1, optional LBK2: 16-bit, 100 kHz, ±10 VDC DAC
Analog output 2, optional LBK2: 16-bit, 100 kHz, ±10 VDC DAC
Analog output 3, optional LBK2: 16-bit, 100 kHz, ±10 VDC DACCounter 3 input
Counter 1 input-15 V supply @ 0.050 A

957096

System Expansion 4-9

4-10

System Expansion

957096

LogBook User’s ManualDBK Basics
This “DBK Basics” section of the manual does not apply to DaqBoard/500 Series or DaqBoard/1000
Series boards. Those boards are not intended for use with DBK options; nor will they support such
options.
Introduction…… 1
How Do DBKs Connect to the Data Acquisition Device? …… 2
Connecting DBKs to DaqBook/100/200 Series Devices, ISA-Type DaqBoards, & LogBooks … 2
Connecting DBKs to Daq PC-Cards ……3Connecting DBKs to DaqBoard/2000 Series Boards …… 4
Connecting DBKs to DaqBook/2000 Series Devices …… 5

DBK Identification Tables ….. 9
Analog Output DBKs …… 9
Digital I/O Control DBKs …… 9
Analog Signal Conditioning DBKs …… 9
Expansion and Terminal Panel Connection DBKs …… 10
Power Supply DBKs …… 12

Tips on Setting up a Data Acquisition System …… 12
Power Supplies and Power Connectors ……14
An Introduction to Power-Related DBKs ….. 15Power Requirements …… 16
Calculating Your System’s Power Needs …… 18
Additional Reading ….. 21

CAUTION
Turn off power to all devices connected to the system before connecting cables orsetting configuration jumpers and switches. Electrical shock or damage toequipment can result even under low-voltage conditions.

CAUTION
The discharge of static electricity can damage some electronic components.
Semiconductor devices are especially susceptible to ESD damage. You should
always handle components carefully, and you should never touch connector pins or
circuit components unless you are following ESD guidelines in an appropriate ESD
controlled area. Such guidelines include the use of properly grounded mats andwrist straps, ESD bags and cartons, and related procedures.

Introduction
The term “DBK” typically refers to a card or module that is used to expand or enhance a primary dataacquisition device, such as a DaqBook, DaqBoard, or LogBook. As will be seen in the upcoming DBK
identification tables, DBKs provide a wide variety of data acquisition functions. Depending on the DBKs
used, one or more of the following can be realized:• signal conditioning• analog output• digital I/O• channel expansion• supplying powering to another acquisition device• providing an interface for different connectivity; for example, in a DaqBoard/2000 Series board,converting a P4, 100-pin connector to P1, P2, and P3 37-pin, DB37 connectors.
Daq Systems

886995

DBK Basics, pg. 1

Reference Notes: During software installation, Adobe® PDF versions of user manuals willautomatically install onto your hard drive as a part of product support. The default location
is in the Programs group, which can be accessed from the Windows Desktop. Refer to the
PDF documentation, especially the DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual(p/n 457-0905) for details regarding both hardware and software in relevant to DBKs.
A copy of the Adobe Acrobat Reader® is included on your CD. The Acrobat Reader
provides a means of reading and printing the PDF documents. Note that hardcopy versionsof the manuals can be ordered from the factory.

How Do DBKs Connect to the Data Acquisition Device?
Each DBK connects to the primary data acquisition device; e.g., a DaqBook, DaqBoard, or LogBook,
through one of three 37-pin ports, which are designated as follows:•••

P1 – Analog I/O
P2 – Digital I/O
P3 – Pulse/Frequency/High-Speed Digital I/O

Depending on the primary data acquisition device, connectivity issues differ slightly. This will be madeclear by the figures and accompanying text that follow.

Connecting DBKs to DaqBook/100/200 Series Devices, ISA-Type DaqBoards, & LogBooks
Reference Notes:
o DaqBoard/2000 Series and /2000c Series users, refer to page 4.
o DaqBook/2000 Series users, refer to page 5.
For DaqBook/100 Series and DaqBook/200 Series devices, ISA-Type DaqBoards, and LogBooks, DBK
connections are not made directly to the port, but through a CA-37-x ribbon cable, where “x” indicates thenumber of expansion devices that can be connected. For example, in addition to providing a DB37
connector to interface with the primary data acquisition device, a CA-37-3 cable includes three additional
DB37 connectors. These provide a means of adding three DBKs to one port. Use of a CA-37-16 cable willallow up to 16 DBKs to be added. The CA-37-x cable system is excellent for DaqBooks, LogBooks, andISA-type DaqBoards.

/100 /200 Series

Connecting DBKs to a DaqBook/100 Series or /200 Series Device
pg. 2,DBK Basics

967794

Daq Systems

The previous figure applies to LogBooks, DaqBook/100/200 Series devices, and ISA-type DaqBoards. As
will be seen elsewhere in this document, some devices do not include all three connectors, i.e., P1, P2, andP3.

Connecting DBKs to Daq PC-Cards
The Daq PC-Card is only intended for connections to a P1 connector of a single “passive” DBK card or
module. A passive DBK card or module is one that provides a desired connectivity (such as BNCs or screw
terminals), but performs no signal conditioning.
A CA-134 Interface Cable and a CN-86-F (dual DB37 female adapter) are used to provide the DB37,
P1 connector.

Daq PC-Card Cabling
The CA-134 cable connects to a CN-86-F adapter, which then connects to a single “passive” card or module.
The passive DBKs are:•••

DBK1 – 16 Connector BNC Module
DBK11A – Screw Terminal Option Card
DBK40 – BNC Analog Interface

Reference Note:
For information regarding the passive DBKs (DBK1, DBK11A, and DBK40), refer tothe DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual (p/n 457-0905).

Daq Systems

967794

DBK Basics, pg. 3

Connecting DBKs to DaqBoard/2000 Series Boards
DaqBoard/2000 Series and cPCI DaqBoard/2000 Series boards have 100-pin connectors designated as P4.
The 100 pins correlate to various pins on P1, P2, and P3 DB37 connectors.* Connectivity in the system is asfollows (see figure).
•

Both the DaqBoard/2000 and /2000c Series board connect to a CA-195 cable.
The cable has two, 100-pin, P4 connectors.

•

The CA-195 connects to a DBK200 Series adapter board or adapter module for 100-pin to
37-pin adaptations, e.g., P4-to-P1, P2, P3; but not necessarily all three.*•

The DBK200 Series adapter connects to a CA-37-x ribbon cable, where “x” indicates thenumber of expansion devices that can be connected. For example, in addition to providing a
DB37 connector to interface with the primary data acquisition device, a CA-37-3 cableincludes three additional DB37 connectors. These provide a means of adding three DBKs to
one port. Use of a CA-37-16 cable will allow up to 16 DBKs to be added.

•

The CA-37-x cable connects to expansion DBKs, in accordance with port type. For example,
Analog DBKs to port P1, Digital DBKs to port P2, and passive DBKs to port P3.

Connecting DBKs to a DaqBoard/2000 Series Board* DaqBoard/2003 and cPCI DaqBoard/2003c are exceptions to the above connectivity method. The /2003
board typically connects directly to a DBK205 (P4-to-Screw Terminal Adapter), as discussed in the DBK
Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual (p/n 457-0905).
Note: DaqBook/2000 Series Devices, which are discussed in the following section, can also connect to DBKs via
a P4 connector, as indicated in the above figure.

pg. 4,DBK Basics

967794

Daq Systems

Connecting DBKs to DaqBook/2000 Series Devices
Several products make use of the DaqBook/2000 nomenclature. However, they do not all offer the sameconnection options. Refer to pinouts for the specific devices, as needed.
Product

Connects to DBK Expansions via …

DaqBook/2001 and /2005

37-pin connectors P1, P2, and P3. There is no P4.

DaqBook/2020

37-pin connectors P1 and P2. There is no P3 or P4.

DaqOEM/2001 and /2005

40-pin headers (JP1, JP2, and JP3). There is no P4.

DaqBook/2000A

37-pin connectors P1, P2, P3, and a 100-pin P4 connector.

DaqBook/2000E

37-pin connectors P1, P2, P3, and a 100-pin P4 connector.

DaqBook/2000X

37-pin connectors P1, P2, P3, and a 100-pin P4 connector.

For DaqBook/2000 Series devices, DBK connections can be made to Ports P1, P2, and/or P3 (whenapplicable). For the “AEX” models a 100-pin P4 connector can be used. A discussion of both methods,
follows.
The P4 connector on a DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device shares signal connections with the
P1, P2, and P3 connectors. P4 offers no additional I/O. Connecting a DBK200 Series
Option to P4 via a CA-195 cable distances the P1, P2, P3 connection from the
DaqBook/2000 Series device. It does not provide any new signal I/O. See the following
Caution.

CAUTION
Signal conflicts between a DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device’s P1, P2, P3 connectors and its
P4 connector can result in erroneous readings and possible equipment damage.
Therefore, when connections have been made to P1, P2, and/or P3, use caution when
making connections through P4, and visa versa.
Refer to P1, P2, P3, and P4 pinouts to avoid making duplicate signal connections.

There are two ways to connect a DBK option to a DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device. The first
method is preferable, as it introduces less noise.
Preferred Method – (a) Connect a CA-37-x cable to the appropriate DB37 connector[P1, P2, or P3] on the DaqBook/2000 Series device. (b) Connect thefree end of the cable to the DBK card or module.
Optional Method – (a) Connect a CA-195-x cable to the P4 connector on the
DaqBook/2000 Series device. (b) Connect the free end of the cable
to a DBK200 Series device. (c) Connect the DBK option to the
DBK200 Series device, as applicable.
The primary reason that less noise is seen in the “preferred” method is that a
DaqBook/2000 Series device’s P1 connector pertains only to analog acquisition signals
and the P2 connector pertains only to digital I/O. This provides a strong degree of
isolation between the two signal types. However, in the case of a CA-195-x cableconnected to P4, digital and analog signals co-exist in one cable.

If you need to use the P4 connection method, use of the 8-inch ribbon cable (CA-195-1)
will result in the lowest level of crosstalk [for that method].

Daq Systems

967794

DBK Basics, pg. 5

Connecting DBKs to a DaqBook/2000 Series Device via P1, P2, and/or P3
The DBKs do not connect directly to the port, but through a CA-37-x ribbon cable, where “x” indicates thenumber of expansion devices that can be connected. For example, a CA-37-3 cable includes a 37-pin mating
connector to interface with the DaqBook/2000 Series DB37 connector (P1, P2, P3); it also includes three
additional DB37 connectors. These provide a means of adding three DBKs to one port. Use of a
CA-37-16 cable will allow up to 16 DBKs to be added to one DaqBook/2000 Series device DB37-type port.

DaqBook/2000
Series Device

Connecting DBKs to a DaqBook/2000 Series Device via P1, P2, and P3

The P4 connector on a DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device shares signal connections with the
P1, P2, and P3 connectors. P4 offers no additional I/O. Connecting a DBK200 Series
Option to P4 via a CA-195 cable distances the P1, P2, P3 connection from the
DaqBook/2000 Series device. It does not provide any new signal I/O. See the following
Caution.

CAUTION
Signal conflicts between a DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device’s P1, P2, P3 connectors and its
P4 connector can result in erroneous readings and possible equipment damage.
Therefore, when connections have been made to P1, P2, and/or P3, use caution when
making connections through P4, and visa versa.
The following pinouts indicate the P1, P2, and P3 pins, and their P4 equivalents.
Use the pinouts to avoid making duplicate signal connections.

pg. 6,DBK Basics

967794

Daq Systems

Connecting DBKs to a DaqBook/2000 “AEX” Device via P4
Every DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device has a 100-pin connector designated as P4. The P4 pins correlate tovarious pins on P1, P2, and P3.
The P4 connector on a DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device shares signal connections with the
P1, P2, and P3 connectors. P4 offers no additional I/O. Connecting a DBK200 Series
Option to P4 via a CA-195 cable distances the P1, P2, P3 connection from the
DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device. It does not provide any new signal I/O. See the following
Caution.

CAUTION
Signal conflicts between a DaqBook/2000 AEX device’s P1, P2, P3 connectors and its
P4 connector can result in erroneous readings and possible equipment damage.
Therefore, when connections have been made to P1, P2, and/or P3, use caution when
making connections through P4, and visa versa.
Refer to P1, P2, P3, and P4 pinouts to avoid making duplicate signal connections.
A brief explanation of P4 connectivity for DaqBook/2000 AEX devices follows the illustration.
DaqBook/2000
Series Device

P4

Connecting DBKs to a DaqBook/2000 AEX Device via P4
DaqBook/2001, DaqBook/2005, DaqOEM/2001, DaqOEM/2005, and DaqBook/2020 do
not have a P4 connector. The P4 connection option applies to “AEX” models only.

Daq Systems

967794

DBK Basics, pg. 7

P4 connectivity for DaqBook/2000 “AEX” devices is as follows:•

One end of a CA-195 cable connects to the DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device’s 100-pin P4
connector. Note that the CA-195 cable has two P4 connectors.

•

The other end of the CA-195 cable connects to a DBK200 Series adapter board [or adapter
module] for 100-pin to 37-pin adaptations, e.g., P4-to-P1, P2, P3; but not necessarily all three.

•

The DBK200 Series adapter connects to one or more CA-37-x ribbon cables, where “x”
indicates the number of expansion devices that can be connected. For example, in addition toproviding a DB37 connector to interface with the primary data acquisition device, a CA-37-3
cable includes three additional DB37 connectors. These provide a means of adding three
DBKs to one port. Use of a CA-37-16 cable will allow up to 16 DBKs to be added.

•

The CA-37-x cable connects to expansion DBKs, in accordance with port type. For example,
Analog DBKs to port P1, Digital DBKs to port P2, and passive DBKs to port P3.

There are two ways to connect a DBK option to a DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device. The first
method is preferable, as it introduces less noise.
Preferred Method – (a) Connect a CA-37-x cable to the appropriate DB37 connector[P1, P2, or P3] on the DaqBook/2000 Series device. (b) Connect thefree end of the cable to the DBK card or module.
Optional Method – (a) Connect a CA-195-x cable to the P4 connector on the
DaqBook/2000 Series device. (b) Connect the free end of the cable
to a DBK200 Series device. (c) Connect the DBK option to the
DBK200 Series device, as applicable.
The primary reason that less noise is seen in the “preferred” method is that a
DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device’s P1 connector pertains only to analog acquisition signals
and the P2 connector pertains only to digital I/O. This provides a strong degree of
isolation between the two signal types. However, in the case of a CA-195-x cableconnected to P4, digital and analog signals co-exist in one cable.

If you need to use the P4 connection method, use of the 8-inch ribbon cable (CA-195-1)
will result in the lowest level of crosstalk [for that method].

The CE Cable Kit, p/n CA-209D, may be required for systems that require a P4 cable
length of 3 feet. The CA-209D kit includes a shielded version of the CA-195 cable, twogrounding pigtails, and associated cable clamps. When properly connected, the shieldedcable provides greater immunity to noise. The CE Compliance chapter includes details.

pg. 8,DBK Basics

967794

Daq Systems

DBK Identification Tables
Analog Output DBKs
Analog Output
Product
DBK2
DBK5
DBK46

Name/Description
Voltage Output Card
Current Output Card
Analog Output Card option for designated devices

I/O
4 channels
4 channels
4 channels

Connects To:
P1
P1
Internal
PC Board

I/O
48 channels
48 channels
24 channels
24 channels
8 channels
16 Channels
32 Channels

Connects To:
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2 or P4
P2 or P4, P1 exp.

Digital I/O Control DBKs
Digital I/O / Control
Product
DBK20
DBK21
DBK23
DBK24
DBK25
DBK208
DBK210Notes

Daq Systems

Name/Description
General-Purpose Digital I/O Card (Screw Terminals)
General-Purpose Digital I/O Card (DB37 Connectors)
Optically Isolated Digital-Input Module
Optically Isolated Digital-Output Module
Relay Output Card
Carrier board for Opto-22 Compatible SSR Digital Modules.
Carrier Board for Grayhill 70M-Series Mini-ModulesoP1, P2, and P3 DB37 connectors do not exist on the DaqBoard/2000 Series boards or /2000c
Series boards, but are obtained by using P4 adapters (DBK200 series boards).

o

For DaqBoard/2000 Series devices, unless otherwise noted, the internal clocks should be set to
100 kHz when used with any of the following DBK options: DBK12, DBK13, DBK15, DBK19,
DBK52, DBK53, and DBK54. See specific DBK section for details.

o

DaqBoard/500 Series boards do not support DBK options.

o

DaqBoard/1000 Series boards do not support DBK options.

o

DaqBook/2000 “AEX” devices have P1, P2, and P3 connectors and, in addition a P4 connector.

967794

DBK Basics, pg. 9

Analog Signal Conditioning DBKs
The DBKs that are used for analog signal conditioning attach to transducers and condition their outputs into
analog voltages. An A/D converter, located in the primary acquisition device, measures the analog voltages.
There are many signal-conditioning solutions available (and more are in development). Note that DBK
high-capacity modules require more circuitry than can fit on a compact card.
Analog Signal Conditioning
Product
DBK4
DBK7
DBK8
DBK9
DBK12
DBK13
DBK15
DBK16
DBK17
DBK18
DBK19
DBK42
DBK43A
DBK44
DBK45
DBK48
DBK50
DBK51
DBK52
DBK53
DBK54
DBK55
DBK65
DBK70
DBK80
DBK81
DBK82
DBK83
DBK84
DBK85
DBK90
DBK207
DBK207/CJC

Notes

pg. 10,DBK Basics

Name/Description
Dynamic Signal Input Card
Frequency-to-Voltage Input Card
High-Voltage Input Card
RTD Measurement Card
Low-Gain Analog Multiplexing Card
See note 2
High-Gain Analog Multiplexing Card
See note 2
Universal Current/Voltage Input Card
See note 2
Strain-Gage Measurement Card
Simultaneous Sample & Hold Card
Low-Pass Filter Card
Thermocouple Card
See note 2
5B Isolated Signal-Conditioning Module
Strain-Gage Measurement Module
5B Isolated Signal-Conditioning Card
SSH and Low-Pass Filter Card
8B Isolated Signal-Conditioning Module
Isolated High-Voltage Input Module
Isolated Low-Voltage Input Module
Thermocouple Input Module
See note 2
Low-Gain Analog Multiplexing Module
See note 2
High-Gain Analog Multiplexing Module
See note 2
Frequency to Voltage Module
Channel Transducer Interface Module
Vehicle Network Interface, Analog Multiplexer Module
Differential Voltage Input Card with Excitation Output
Thermocouple Card, High-Accuracy
Thermocouple Card, High-Accuracy
Thermal Couple Card, High-Accuracy; uses Connection Pod
Thermocouple Module, High-Accuracy
Differential Voltage Module
Thermocouple Module, High-Accuracy
Carrier Board for 5B Compatible Analog Input Modules
Carrier Board for 5B Compatible Analog Input Modules.
DBK207/CJC includes cold junction compensation (CJC)

I/O
2 channels
4 channels
8 channels
8 channels
16 channels
16 channels
16 channels
2 channels
4 channels
4 channels
14 channels
16 channels
8 channels
2 channels
4 channels
16 channels
8 channels
8 channels
14 channels
16 channels
16 channels
8 channels
8 channels
16 channels
16 channels
7 channels
14 channels
14 channels
14 channels
16 channels
56 channels
16 channels
16 channels

Connects To:
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1 or P4
P1 or P4o

P1, P2, and P3 DB37 connectors do not exist on the DaqBoard/2000 Series boards or /2000c
Series boards, but are obtained by using P4 adapters (DBK200 series boards).

o

For DaqBoard/2000 Series devices, unless otherwise noted, the internal clocks should be set to
100 kHz when used with any of the following DBK options: DBK12, DBK13, DBK15, DBK19,
DBK52, DBK53, and DBK54. See specific DBK section for details.

o

DaqBoard/500 Series boards do not support DBK options.

o

DaqBoard/1000 Series boards do not support DBK options.

o

DaqBook/2000 “AEX” devices have P1, P2, and P3 connectors and, in addition a P4 connector.

967794

Daq Systems

Expansion and Terminal Panel Connection DBKs
The following DBKs offer provide various expansion and connection options. The stackable 3-slot DBK10
low-profile enclosure can be used for up to three DBKs. If a system has more than 3 DBKs, the 10-slot
DBK41 can be used. Several DBK41s can be daisy-chained to accommodate many DBKs in one system.
Expansion and Connection, General
Product
DBK1
DBK10
DBK11A

Name/Description
16-Connector BNC Adapter Module
3-Slot Expansion Chassis
Screw-Terminal Option Card (DB37-Screw Terminal Block)

DBK40
DBK41
DBK60

BNC Interface
Analog Expansion Enclosure
Expansion Chassis with Termination Panels

I/O
16 connectors
3 cards
Component
sockets
18 connectors
10 cards
3 cards

Connects To:
P1
P1, P2, or P3
P1, P2, or P3

I/O
none
16 connectors
16 connectors
8 differential (16)16 differential

Connects To:
N/A
DBK Card
DBK Card
DBK Card
DBK Card

48 connectors
none
three DB37

DBK Card
N/A
DBK Card

P1
P1
P1 or P2

Termination Panels, Connectivity for DaqBoard/260
Product
DBK601
DBK602
DBK603
DBK604
DBK605

Name/Description
Termination Panel - Blank rear panel
Termination Panel - BNC rear panel
Termination Panel - Safety Jacks, single ended
Termination Panel - Safety Jacks, differential
Termination Panels - Thermocouple, differential panels;
specify type: B, J, K, R, S, or T
Termination Panel – 3 Terminal Blocks; 16 connections per TB
Termination Panel – strain relief clamp
Termination Panel – 3 female DB37 connectors

DBK606
DBK607
DBK608Several signal connection options were developed primarily for use with DaqBoard/2000 Series andcPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series Boards. The DBK200 Series P4-Adapter documentation provides the basic
connection concepts. That information, along with the related DBK subsections should enable you to set up
your desired configuration.
Connection Interface Boards and Modules
Product
DBK200
DBK201
DBK202
DBK203
DBK204
DBK205
DBK206
DBK209
DBK213
DBK214
DBK215

Description
P4-to-P1 Adapter Board
P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board
P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board with Screw-Terminals
A module version of DBK202
A module version of DBK202 with an included CE cable kit.
P4-to-TB1 12-slot Screw Terminal Block for DaqBoard/2003.
P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board with Screw-Terminals
P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Mini-Adapter Board
3 card slots, Screw Terminal & Expansion Module
16-Connector BNC Interface Module, with Screw-Terminals
16-Connector BNC Connection Module with Screw-Terminals;
for use withDaqBoard/500 Series and DaqBoard/1000 Series

Connects To:
P4
P4
P4
P4
P4
P4
P4
P4
P1, P2, P3, P4
P1, P2, P3, P4
SCSI 68

Note 1:P1, P2, and P3 DB37 connectors do not exist on the DaqBoard/2000 Series or /2000c Series boards,
but are obtained by using P4 adapters (DBK200 series). These adapters typically connect to the
DaqBoard/2000 Series [/2000c Series] 100-pin P4 connector via cable.

Note 2:

DBK215 is only for use with DaqBoard/500 Series and DaqBoard/1000 Series. It cannot be used with
DaqBoard/2000 Series devices.

*

Daq Systems

I/O
P1
P1, P2, P3
P1, P2, P3 *P1, P2, P3 *P1, P2, P3 *TB1, 12-slot
P1, P2, P3 *P1, P2, P3 *P1, P2, P3 *P1, P2, P3, BNC *BNC *An asterisk in the I/O column indicates that the associated device includes screw-terminal blocks.

967794

DBK Basics, pg. 11

Power Supply DBKs
Power supply type DBKs are typically used in laboratory, automotive, and field applications. Input power
can come from any +10 to +20 VDC source, or from an AC source by using an appropriately rated AC-toDC adapter. The DBK30A rechargeable power supply can power DBK modules where AC mains are notavailable (the DBK30A outputs 28 V for powering transducers). For a large number of DBK cards, theDBK32A or DBK33 can be installed into an expansion slot. The DBK33 is used when +5 V is required inaddition to ±15 VDC. The DBK34 provides a steady 12 or 24 VDC while working with vehicle electricalsystems that may be turned on or off during testing.
Power Supply
Product
Name/Description
DBK30A
Rechargeable Battery/Excitation Module
DBK32A
Auxiliary Power Supply Card
DBK33
Triple-Output Power Supply Card
DBK34
Vehicle UPS Module
DBK34AUPS Battery ModulePower+12-14, 24-28 VDC (3.4 A-hr @ 14 VDC)
±15 V @ 500 mA±15 V @ 250 mA; +5 V @ 1 A
12/24 VDC (5 A-hr @12 VDC)
12/24 VDC (5 A-hr @12 VDC)

Tips on Setting up a Data Acquisition System
A successful installation involves setting up equipment and setting software parameters. In addition to thismanual, you may need to consult your Daq device or LogBook user’s manual.
DBKs should be configured before connections are made and power is applied. This sequence can prevent
equipment damage and will help ensure proper operation on startup. Many DBKs have on-board jumpers
and/or DIP switches that are used for setting channels and other variables. You will need to refer to theindividual DBK document modules to ensure that the DBKs are properly configured for you application.
Prior to designing or setting up a custom data acquisition system, you should review the following tips.
After reviewing the material you can write out the steps to setup a system that will best meet your specificapplication needs.
1.

The end use of the acquisition data should be used to determine how you set up and program youracquisition system. Prior to creating the system you should understand its layout and know how you aregoing to assign the channels. If you can answer the following questions you are off to a good start. If
not, you need to find the answers.
•
•
•
•
•

pg. 12,

What engineering units, ranges, sampling rates, etc. are best for your data?
Will the data be charted graphically, statistically processed, or exported to other programs?
How will the data be used?
How will the data be saved?
What are the system power requirements? Using several DBKs or transducers that require
excitation current may require an extra power supply, e.g., a DBK32A.

2.

Assign channel numbers.

3.

Plan the location of transducers, cable runs, DBKs, the acquisition device [LogBook or Daq device],and the computer. Label your transducers, cables, and connectors to prevent later confusion.

DBK Basics

967794

Daq Systems

4.

When configuring your LogBook or Daq device(s) consider the following:•

LogBook calibration is typically performed automatically through LogView software;
however, some DBKs may require manual calibration.

•

The DaqBook/100 Series and DaqBook/200 Series devices, and DaqBoards (ISA type)have internal jumpers and switches that you must set manually to match yourapplication.

•

Some DaqBook/100 Series and DaqBook/200 Series models are partially configured insoftware.

•

DaqBook/2000 Series devices have no jumpers or internal switches and are configured
entirely through software.

•

Daq PC-Cards are configured entirely in software.

•

DaqBoard/2000 Series boards are PCI type boards. They have no jumpers or switches andare configured entirely through software.

•cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series boards are compact PCI (cPCI) type boards. They have no
jumpers or switches and are configured entirely through software.

•

You may need to refer to other documentation, such as Quick Starts, Installation Guides,
User’s Manuals, and pertinent DBK document modules.

5.

Perform all hardware configurations before connecting signal and power. Remember toconfigure all the DBK cards and modules for your application. Several jumpers and DIP switches
may need to be set (channel, gain, filters, signal mode, etc).

6.

Setting up channel parameters often requires both hardware and software setup.

7.

Route and connect all signal and power cables while all power is turned OFF.

8.

To minimize electrical noise, route all signal lines away from any RF or high-voltage devices.

9.

Follow your device’s specific installation instructions. For certain devices software should be installedfirst; for others, hardware should be installed prior to software installation.

10. After software is loaded, remember to set the software parameters as needed for your application.
The software must recognize all the hardware in the system. Measurement units and ranges
should be checked to verify that they meet your application requirements.
11. Remember to set all channels to the proper mode for your DBK or other signal source.
12. After your system is up and running, verify proper data acquisition and data storage.
13. Verify system accuracy; adjust ranges or calibrate as needed.
14. Device specific information regarding system setup and expansion can be found in the Daq and
LogBook User’s manuals; and in the applicable DBK document modules of this manual.
15. If you are considering system expansion, review the DBK10, DBK41, and DBK60 document modules.
The best option depends on the number of DBK cards in your system. For just a few cards, use thestackable 3-slot DBK10 low-profile expansion enclosure. For more than six cards, use the 10-slot
DBK41. DBK41s can be daisy-chained to one-another to handle a large number of DBKs.
16. In regard to power management, you should review the DBK30A, DBK32A, and DBK33 document
modules. For portable applications, the compact DBK30A rechargeable power supply can provide
power to the DBK10 or DBK41. The DBK30A also includes a 28 V output for powering 4 to 20 mA
transducers. For applications with many DBK cards (initially or in future expansion), the DBK32A or
DBK33 can be installed into any expansion slot. The DBK32A provides ±15 VDC and the DBK33
provides ±15 VDC and +5 VDC.

Daq Systems

967794

DBK Basics, pg. 13

Power Supplies and Power Connectors
Power supplies convert the raw power they receive into a lower DC voltage and/or current for use by
devices with various power demands. Many of the power supplies that are used to power data acquisition
equipment are of the switching-mode type. These devices provide a regulated output whether the power
supply’s input is, for example, 60 Hz, 120 VAC as in the United States or, 50 Hz, 220 VAC as found inEuropean countries. Small power supplies, that do not switch, consist of simple transformer/rectifiers andfiltered capacitors; and operate over a smaller voltage range.
Some manufacturers improve the power output of their units over time, without changing the model
number. For example, one very popular power supply was previously rated at 15 VDC @ 2.7 amps, yetmore recent versions of the same model number are rated 15 VDC @ 3.3 amps. Read the manufacturer’s
information pertaining to your power supplies so you don’t accidentally overload the supply.
DBKs – The following table indicates the type of power supply that is typically used with certain DBKs.
These DBKs can be powered from a

These DBKs can be powered from a

Switching-Mode Type Power Supply

Transformer/Rectifier Type, Unregulated Power Supply

The switching-mode power supply typicallyreceives power from a 100 to 240 VAC source at 50
Hz to
60 Hz and converts it to the 15 VDC required by the
DBK.

The DBKs in this column use up to15 VDC @900 mA. This transformer/rectifier type power
supply receives power from a 110 to 125 VAC
source, at 60 Hz, and converts it to the 15 VDC
required.

DBK

Description

DBK

Description

DBK32A

Auxiliary Power Supply Card

DBK23

Optically Isolated Digital-Input Module

DBK33

Triple-Output Power Supply Card

DBK24

Optically Isolated Digital-Output Module

DBK42

5B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module

DBK43A

Strain Gage Measurement Module

DBK70

Vehicle Network Interface

DBK50

Isolated High-Voltage Input Module

DBK51

Isolated Low-Voltage Input Module

The DIN5 is the system’s basic power connector (see the following figure). The CA-115 is a 6-in. cablewith a plug (male) DIN5 connector on both ends. The CA-115 is used to connect DBK32As [or DBK33s]
in parallel when they are to be powered by the same power supply.
Power Output Connector
Male connector located on the
power supply cable and on bothends of the CA-115 cable.

Power Input Connector
Female connector located on
the device being powered(DaqBook, DBK32A, DBK33).

(see Notes 1 and 2)

DIN5 Power Connectors

pg. 14,

DBK Basics

DIN5 Power Out
On a DBK34 and DBK34A

Note 1:

DIN5 connectors for LogBook, DBK34, and DBK34A have threaded retaining rings.

Note 2:In regard to the above pinout for the DBK34 and DBK34A Power Out DIN5 connector, the 28 V
pin is only active when the device is in the 28 VDC mode; however, the 14 V pin is active
regardless of the mode selected.

967794

Daq Systems

An Introduction to Power-Related DBKs
The power-related DBK options are the DBK30A, DBK32A, DBK33, DBK34, and DBK34A. From thestandpoint of providing reliable power, these DBKs have proven convenient in laboratory, automotive, andfield applications.
Input power for these devices can come from any 10 to 20 VDC source, or from an AC source via an
appropriate AC-to-DC adapter.
A brief synopsis of the DBK power options follows. Refer to the respective document modules for complete
information.

DBK30A module - provides power at 14 and 28 VDC with a rated capacity of 3.4 A-hr @ 14 VDC.
The DBK30A’s 28 V output will power 4 to 20 mA transducers. The module’s rechargeable power supply canpower DBK modules in situations where AC mains are not available.

Note:

Some transducers (e.g., 2-wire 4-20 mA transmitters, bridge-configured sensors, etc) require an
excitation voltage in order to work properly. The DBK30A supplies 14 and 28 VDC. Consult
transducer documentation before applying power.

DBK32A - provides ±15 VDC @ 500 mA.

DBK33 - provides ±15 VDC @ 250 mA and +5 VDC @ 1000 mA.

The DBK32A and DBK33 power cards attach directly to the P1 analog expansion bus where they supply
power to DBK analog expansion cards. The DBK32A and the DBK33 can be powered from an included AC
adapter, an optional DBK30A battery module, or from a +10 to +20 VDC source such as a car battery.
When installed in a DBK10 three-slot expansion chassis, the DBK32A or DBK33 supplies power
to the analog DBK [that is to receive power] via a CA-37-x cable.
If used with the DBK41 ten-slot expansion enclosure, the DBK32A or DBK33 installs into one of the analog
expansion slots on the DBK41’s backplane. A power card in any DBK41slot (other than the leftmost, whenviewed from the rear) will power the other cards that are connected to the DBK41’s backplane.

CAUTION
If using a DBK32A or a DBK33 with a DaqBook/100 Series, DaqBook/200 Series, or a
DaqBoard [ISA type] device, you must entirely remove the shunt jumpers from JP1.
Failure to do so will result in damage to the 8254 timer chip. Refer to the power card
document modules and to the Daq device Hardware sections of the DaqBook/100 Series
and DaqBook/200 Series, and DaqBoard [ISA] user’s manuals for JP1 locations andconfigurations.

DBK34A module – provides 12 or 24 VDC with a 5.0 or 2.5 A-hr capacity (respectively).
The DBK34A is classified as a UPS / Battery module. The module can be used for in-vehicle testingin scenarios where the vehicle’s electrical system does not affect acquisition device power during
starter-current surge, or power-off.

Daq Systems

967794

DBK Basics, pg. 15

Power Requirements
The improper use of power can cause system damage. The following terms are important in regard tounderstanding your system’s power needs.
•

Supply power for signal conditioning type DBKs comes from a primary acquisition device,
such as a DaqBook/2000 Series device or LogBook, or from a power card or module. If
needed, the DBK32A or DBK33 can provide additional power to meet DBK power demands.
The DBK power supplies work off of low-voltage DC that can come from an AC adapter orfrom a DC source, such as a car battery.

•

Demand for power comes from DBK cards and modules [and in some systems, fromtransducers]. You should use the DBK Power Requirement Worktable to calculate yoursystem’s power needs. After completing the table, compare the total power demand to the
supply power.

•

Distribution of power to most DBKs is via the P1 interface. The DBK41 expansion chassis
has a jumper to isolate +5 VDC power from P1. The P1 Pin designations are as follows:
Pin 1: +5 VDC
Pin 2: -15 VDC
Pin 21: +15 VDC
Pin 7: digital groundPin 28: analog groundPin 29: analog ground

Note: Certain DBK modules have their own internal power supplies and require only 10 VDC to 20 VDC.

LogBook
The LogBook [with no DBKs attached] uses approximately 12 Watts of power. If using battery-power, you
can compute operational endurance from your battery’s watt×hr rating and the following calculation tables.

DaqBoard/2000 Series Boards
DaqBoard/2000 Series and cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series Boards use 3.5 watts of power(700 mA @ 5 VDC) from their host computer. Power consumption can be up to 10 W with external
accessories.
Avoid power cycling the host PC. Wait 10 seconds after powering down the host PC before powering itback on. This will allow any residual voltages to decay enabling the DaqBoard/2000 Series or /2000c Seriesboard to start up in a known good state.

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series, DaqBoard [ISA], and Daq PC-Card
If using power from AC mains (through adapter), you need not worry about Daq device power use. If using
battery-power, you can compute operational endurance from the battery’s watt×hr rating and power tables.
Daq PC-Card and DaqBoard use power from their host PC.
DaqBook/100 and DaqBook/200 Series devices use no power from the PC, but do require DC voltage froman AC-to-DC adapter, or another suitable source. Voltage needs are as follows:•+7 to +20 VDC for DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112, and DaqBook/120•+10 to +24 VDC for DaqBook/216•

9 to +18 VDC for DaqBook/200 and DaqBook/260.

Various AC adapter models support power grids of USA, Europe, Japan, and Asia.

pg. 16,

DBK Basics

967794

Daq Systems

DaqBook/2000 Series Devices
If using power from AC mains (through adapter), you need not worry about Daq device power use. If using
battery-power, you can compute operational endurance from the battery’s watt×hr rating and power tables.
DaqBook/2000 Series devices use no power from the PC, but do require DC voltage from an AC-to-DC
adapter with a supply range of +10 VDC to +30 VDC, or another suitable DC source.
Various AC adapter models support power grids of USA, Europe, Japan, and Asia.

Power Requirements Table
DevicePower Required (Watts)

DaqBook/100

510 mA @ 12 VDC = 6.12 W

DaqBook/112

360 mA @ 12 VDC = 4.32 W

DaqBook/120

510 mA @ 12 VDC = 6.12 W

DaqBook/200

620 mA @ 12 VDC = 7.44 W

DaqBook/216

600 mA @ 12 VDC = 7.2 W

DaqBook/260

620 mA @ 12 VDC = 7.44 W

DaqBook/2001, /2005

1000 mA @ 15 VDC = 15.0 W

DaqBook/2020

1000 mA @ 15 VDC = 15.0 W

DaqOEM/2001, /2005

1000 mA @ 15 VDC = 15.0 W

DaqLab1000 mA @ 15 VDC = 15.0 W

DaqScan1000 mA @ 15 VDC = 15.0 W

DaqBoard/100A

1330 mA @ 5 VDC = 6.65 W

DaqBoard/112A

970 mA @ 5 VDC = 4.85 W

DaqBoard/200A

1700 mA @ 5 VDC = 8.5 W

DaqBoard/216A

1340 mA @ 5 VDC = 6.7 W

DaqBoard/2000 Series board

700 mA @ 5 VDC = 3.5 W(Note 1)cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series board

700 mA @ 5 VDC = 3.5 W(Note 1)

DaqBook/2000A

Under No External Load (0W):

DaqBook/2000X

467mA @ 15VDC = 7 W
Under Full External Load (15W):
1533mA @ 15VDC = 23 W

DaqBook/2000E

Under No External Load (0W):
1133mA @ 15VDC = 17 W
Under Full External Load (15W):
2200mA @ 15VDC = 33 W
Normal Operation:

Daq PC-Card/112B
Daq PC-Card/216B

160 mA @ 5 VDC = 0.8W
Power Down Mode:
40 mA @ 5 VDC = 0.2 W

Note 1: For DaqBoard/2000 Series and /2000c Series boards, consumption can be
up to 10 W with external accessories.

Daq Systems

967794

DBK Basics, pg. 17

Calculating Your System’s Power Needs
Use the chart below and the worktable on the next page to ensure your system will have sufficient power.
If the load (calculated in the worktable) exceeds available power (from the chart at the right), you must
add a power card or a module such as a DBK32A or DBK33.
Available Power Chart — Supply to Expansion Devices
Product
Available Power
LogBook+5 VDC @ 0.10 A from P1-1, P2-18, P2-20, P3-20+15 VDC @ 0.15 A from P1-21+15 VDC @ 0.05 A from P3-19-15 VDC @ 0.15 A from P1-2
-15 VDC @ 0.05 A from P3-37

pg. 18,DBK Basics

DaqBook/100

2100 mW

DaqBook/112

2400 mW

DaqBook/120

2100 mW

DaqBook/200

4000 mW

DaqBook/216

4000 mW

DaqBook/260

4000 mW

DaqBook/2000 AEX

15000 mW; 5V at 1 A; ± 15 V at 500 mA each

DaqBook/2001, /2005

10,000 mW

DaqBook/2020

7,000 mW

DaqOEM/2001, /2005

10,000 mW

DaqLab

10,000 mW

DaqScan

10,000 mW

DaqBoard/100A

3300 mW

DaqBoard/112A

3300 mW

DaqBoard/200A

3000 mW

DaqBoard/216A

3000 mW

DaqBoard/260A

3000 mW

DaqBoard/2000 Series& /2000c Series

5000 mW; 5 V at 1 A; ±15 V at 75 mA each (withexception of DaqBoard/2002 and /2002c)

Daq PC-Card/112B

0 mW

Daq PC-Card/216B

0 mW

967794

Daq Systems

Available Power Chart — Supply to Expansion Devices
Product
Available Power
DBK32
7500 mW
DBK32A

15000 mW

DBK33

7500 mW

DBK34

5 A-hr in 12 V mode; fused at 8 A

DBK34A

5 A-hr in 12 V mode; fused at 8 A

Use the following procedure and table to calculate the required system power.
1.

In the Quantity column (5th), list the number of DBKs of that type in your system.

2.

In the Sub Total column (7th), enter the product of column 5 and column 6 (mW).

3.

Add the Sub Total column, and enter the sum at the bottom right of the table.
This result is your power requirement in mW.

DBK32, DBK32A, and DBK34 cannot supply +5 VDC. In cases that require +5 VDC, if
the +5 VDC requirement exceeds 500 mW from a LogBook or Daq device, then a DBK33
must be used. Note that DBK33 can supply 1000 mW at +5 VDC.

Note:

Daq Systems

The DBK34 has an 8 amp fuse, and has a capacity of 5 A-hr when in the 12V mode,
and a capacity of 2.5 A-hr when in the 24V mode.

967794

DBK Basics, pg. 19

DBK Power Requirement Worktable—Demand
Voltage Reference
Calculation

DBK
Options+15 VDC-15 VDC+5 VDC

Quantity

× mW

DBK1

0

0

0

0

DBK2

18 mA

18 mA

5 mA

565

DBK4

95 mA

80 mA

25 mA

2750

DBK5

2 mA

2 mA

15 mA

135

DBK7

14 mA

8 mA

18 mA

420

DBK8

15 mA

15 mA

<1 mA

455

DBK9

21 mA

16 mA

<1 mA

560

DBK10

0

0

0

0

DBK11A

0

0

0

0

DBK12

15 mA

15 mA

<1 mA

455

DBK13

15 mA

15 mA

<1 mA

455

DBK15

16 mA

16 mA

<1 mA

485

DBK16

37 mA

32 mA

<1 mA

1040

DBK17

30 mA

30 mA

<1 mA

905

DBK18

36 mA

36 mA

<1 mA

1085

DBK19

6 mA

7 mA

<1 mA

200

DBK20

0

0

<10 mA

50

DBK21

0

0

<10 mA50

DBK23***

0

0

<2 mA

10

DBK24***

0

0

<2 mA

10

DBK25

0

0

<2 mA

10

DBK40

0

0

0

0

DBK41

0

0

0

0

DBK42

<1 mA

<1 mA

<1 mA

35

DBK43A***

<1 mA

<1 mA

<1 mA

35

DBK44

<1 mA

<1 mA

60 mA (Note 1)

330

DBK45

52 mA

52 mA

<1 mA

1565

DBK46

20 mA

20 mA

400 mA

2600

DBK48

<1 mA

<1 mA

<1 mA

35

DBK50***

<1 mA

<1 mA

<1 mA

35

DBK51***

<1 mA

<1 mA

<1 mA

35

DBK52

6 mA

7 mA

<1 mA

200

DBK53

15 mA

15 mA

<1 mA

455

DBK54

15 mA

15 mA

<1 mA

455

DBK55

30 mA

20 mA

40 mA

950

DBK60

0

0

0

0

= Sub Total

Total Power Requirement in mW
Note 1: DBK44’s 60 mA value is based on 30 mA for each of two 5B modules. This value will be higher if using
5B module 5B38 (200 mA for each 5B38), or if using 5B39 (170 mA for each 5B39). Refer to the DBK44
document module for more information.
Note 2: DBK2 and DBK5 are not used with LogBook.
***

Three asterisks indicate that the DBK is a module with internal power supply; powered separately.

This table is continued.
pg. 20,DBK Basics

967794

Daq Systems

DBK Power Requirement Worktable—Demand
Voltage Reference
Calculation

DBK
Options+15 VDC-15 VDC+5 VDC

Quantity

× mW

DBK65

25 mA

25 mA

1 mA

755

DBK70***

<1 mA

<1 mA

<1 mA

35

DBK80

25 mA

25 mA

<1 mA

755

DBK81

35 mA

35 mA

<2 mA

1060

DBK82

60 mA

60 mA

<2 mA

1810

DBK83

60 mA

60 mA

<2 mA

1810

DBK84

60 mA

60 mA

<2 mA

1810

DBK85

25 mA

25 mA

1 mA

755

DBK90

40 mA

40 mA

40 mA

1400

DBK20000

00

DBK20100

0

0

DBK20200

0

0

DBK20300

0

0

DBK20400

0

0

DBK20500

0

0DBK20600

0

0DBK207

<1 mA

<1 mA

<1 mA

35

DBK207/CJC

<1 mA

<1 mA

<1 mA

35

DBK208

0

0

6 mA

30

DBK20900

00DBK210

0

0

90 mA

450

DBK21300

00DBK214

0

0

10 mA

50

DBK215

0

0

10 mA

50

= Sub Total

Total Power Requirement in mW
Note 2: DBK207, DBK207/CJC, DBK208, and DBK210 are not used with LogBook.
***
Three asterisks indicate that the DBK is a module with internal power supply; powered separately.

Additional Reading
During software installation, Adobe® PDF versions of user manuals will automatically install onto your hard drive
as a part of product support. The default location is in the Programs group, which can be accessed from theWindows Desktop. Refer to the PDF documentation for details regarding both hardware and software.
A copy of the Adobe Acrobat Reader® is included on your CD. The Reader provides a means of reading andprinting the PDF documents. Note that hardcopy versions of the manuals can be ordered from the factory.

Daq Systems

967794

DBK Basics, pg. 21

pg. 22,

DBK Basics

967794

Daq Systems

LBK and other non-DBK Options

5

LBK Options, Location Reference …… 5-1
LBK/COM/422/485 …… 5-2
LBK/MEM1-U, Expanded Memory (16 MB Upgrade) …… 5-3
LBK1, Remote LogBook Terminal …… 5-4
LBK2, Four Channel, Digital-to-Analog Output …… 5-9
Remote On/Off Switch and LED Indicator Options …… 5-11
Reference Notes:¾ GPS and Serial Device Data Collection information is presented in Chapter 6.
¾ Modem and Upload Scheduler information is presented in Chapter 7.

LBK Options, Location Reference
The following location reference applies to hardware aspects of LogBook’s LBK options. A fuse, serial board,and PC-Card are included in the illustration for component reference.
Although the following drawing is based on LogBook/360, it can be used for LogBook/300 motherboard
reference. The remainder of this chapter discusses the installation of each option, and includes a board layout.

Component Location Reference
Notes: (1) Information regarding LBK1 (the remote LogBook Terminal) begins on page 4-4.
(2) The actual LogBook motherboard, depicted above for LogBook/360, also applies to LogBook/300.
(3) The AUX/GPS Serial Board is factory-installed in LogBook/360.
(4) The AUX/GPS Serial Board is not used in LogBook/300.

LogBook User’s Manual

919495

LBK and other non-DBK Options

5-1

LBK/COM/422/485
The standard LogBook communications board supports RS-232 only; but as an option, the LogBook canbe purchased with the additional capability for RS-422 and RS-485. These optional boards(p/n LBK/COM/422/485) have circuitry for three communication protocols. If your communication board
has the RS-422/485 option, you can switch between RS-232 and RS-422/485 by switching the board’s
orientation in the CN8 slot.
SERIAL COM pinouts for RS-232 and RS-422 / RS-485 are included on the following page.

WARNING
Electric shock hazard. Turn off power to all system-connected devices prior toconnecting or disconnecting cables, or setting hardware configurations. Failure to
do so could result in electric shock or death, and equipment damage, even under
low-voltage conditions.

CAUTION
Perform the following procedure using ESD tools, containers, and procedures. Oneor more related components are sensitive to damage from electrostatic discharge.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Turn off system power.
Remove the LogBook’s top cover and locate CN8 (see figure for location).
Remove the RS-232/485 board from CN8. Note that CN8 has two release clips.
Rotate the RS-232/485 board to a relatively upside-down position, and insert back into CN8. Notethat onboard text indicates which end should be up for a given communication option, i.e.,
RS-232 ↑ UP ↑, or RS-485 ↑ UP ↑.
For RS-485 applications, ensure the address setting on rotary switch SW2 is unassigned; and change
the address if needed. See note.
Replace the top cover and screws.
Turn on system power.
Notes:(1) The CN8 slot has two release
clips that must be depressed
to release the COM card.
(2) The COM Card has onboard
text, indicating orientation, as
follows:“RS-232 ↑ UP ↑”“RS-485 ↑ UP ↑”The LBK/COM/422/485 Card
inserts into the CN8 slot on
LogBook’s Motherboard.

LogBook Motherboard, CN8 Location Reference
For RS-485 applications, rotary switch SW2 sets the address.
SW2 is located next to CN8, just inside the PC-Card door. Use asmall flat-head screwdriver to set a particular address (1 of 16) in a
multi-drop RS-485 network. Rotate the switch so the black dot aligns
with the desired, previously unassigned, address.

5-2

LBK and other non-DBK Options

919495

LogBook User’s Manual

RS-232 Mode
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

RS-422 / RS-485 Mode

Description
Not Used
RxD
TxD
Not Used
Common
Not Used
RTS
CTS
Not Used

Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Description
Common
Not Used
Not Used
T(+)
T(-)
Not Used
Not UsedR(+)
R(-)

LBK/COM/422/485 Option, Comparative Pinouts

LBK/MEM1-U, Expanded Memory (16 MB Upgrade)
The standard 4-MB RAM can be user-replaced with a 16 MB board (LBK/MEM1-U). The expanded
memory creates a larger data buffer, allowing more time to swap PC-Cards. This is convenient when using
fast scan rates. Note that the 16 MB memory option can also be installed at the factory (LBK/MEM1).

WARNING
Electric shock hazard. Turn off power to all system-connected devices prior toconnecting or disconnecting cables, or setting hardware configurations. Failure to
do so could result in electric shock or death, and equipment damage, even under
low-voltage conditions.

CAUTION
Perform the following procedure using ESD tools, containers, and procedures. Oneor more related components are sensitive to damage from electrostatic discharge.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Turn off system power.
Remove LogBook’s top cover and locate SIMM socket CN5 (see figure). The CN5, 72-pin socket,
holds the RAM Memory Board.
Using ESD precautions, depress CN5’s two release clips and remove the 4-MB board.
Using ESD precautions, insert a 16 MB board (LBK/MEM1-U) into CN5. Note that the board andsocket are keyed to mate one-way-only, and will lock together when properly mated.
Replace the top cover and screws.
Turn on system power.
Note:
The CN5 slot has two release
clips that must be depressed torelease the memory card.

The LBK/MEM1-U Memory
Board inserts into the CN5 slot
on LogBook’s Motherboard.

LogBook Motherboard, CN5 Location Reference
LogBook User’s Manual

919495

LBK and other non-DBK Options

5-3

LBK1, Remote LogBook Terminal
Hardware Description
The LBK1 remote-operation terminal connects to LogBook and provides control of the LogBook with nocomputer attached. With the LBK1, the basic LogBook operations can be controlled with a push of abutton; and acquisition data can still be monitored.
LogBook can operate without an LBK1 and with no PC attached. However, suchoperation requires the use of a programmed PC-card.

Physical Features of LBK1.
•

The control panel has a 16-line × 40-character back-lit LCD display (4.25 × 2.25 in.).

•

The keypad has 29 membrane switches. Six “soft-keys” are located under the LCD display; theirprogrammed function is shown in the bottom row of the LCD display. Numeric keys are available
for entering various parameters in a signed, decimal format. Other keys are used to initiate themanual trigger, mark events, navigate the menu, enter/cancel settings, and turn the system on andoff.

•

The LBK1 has a beeper to confirm keystrokes; there are no LEDs.

•

The LBK1 has one connector (an RJ11) that attaches to the LogBook’s DB9 connector via the
supplied cable. The supplied cable is 2 ft long. Cable options include: a coiled, retractable cable(6 ft max) and a shielded 3 ft cable to comply with CE standards. Cable lengths up to a maximum of
100 ft from LogBook can be used.

•

No batteries are required; LBK1 power comes from the LogBook.

•

An optional LBK1 mount can be attached to LogBook for convenient mounting of the LBK1
module.

•The size of the LBK1 is 7.875 × 4.375 × 1.125 in. (200 × 111 × 29 mm).

Capabilities
LBK1’s capabilities and limitations are highlighted in the following table. Note that,
although LBK1 provides many LogBook functions, it does not provide the degree ofcontrol that can be obtained by using a PC and LogView.
Capabilities. The LBK1 can:Indicate LogBook power status, acquisition state, and systemerrors.
Provide the user with control to start/stop an acquisition, to
initiate a manual trigger, and to mark events.
Display channel values numerically: Any measured input
channel may be displayed in real time during acquisitions.
Any enabled, displayable channel may be displayed if theacquisition is halted.
Monitor disk status, showing what percentage of the disk is
full.
Set LogBook time.

5-4

LBK and other non-DBK Options

919495

Limitations. The LBK1 cannot:
Set up a new acquisition configuration.
View charts and graphs.
Perform mathematical functions with
virtual channels.
Run LogView.
Internally store data.

LogBook User’s ManualLBK1 Installation
System Connection
1.

Connect the supplied cable’s DB9P
connector to the LogBook’s DB9S
connector and tighten the locking
screws.
On LogBook/300 the connector islabeled “FROM CONTROLLER”.
On LogBook/360 the connector islabeled “TERMINAL (TO LBK1).

2.

Connect the cable’s RJ-11 connector
to the LBK1’s corresponding socket.

LBK1 with Early-Style LogBook/300
Mounting Rack
An optional mounting rack (p/n Mount1) can be used
to hold the LBK1 securely to the LogBook. For
convenience, you can mount the LBK1 length-wise or
width-wise on the rack (see figure).
1.
2.
3.

Note:

Mount LBK1 on the rack in the desiredorientation, and attach 2 screws through therack to the LBK1.
Mount rack onto the LogBook, and attach 4
screws to hold the rack to the LogBook.
Attach cable, RJ-11 side to the LBK1 andDB9 side to the LogBook.
The mounting rack can be attached to otherequipment, racks, shelves, or other support
structures.

LBK1 and Rack (p/n Mount1) Shown both
Assembled (bottom) and Disassembled (top)Note: Early-Style LogBook Depicted

LogBook User’s Manual

919495

LBK and other non-DBK Options

5-5

Control-Panel Functions

Remote LogBook Terminal
Main Menu
System Time
Acq State
Acq Name
Acq
Conf

Sys
State

:
:
:

11/ 01 /2000 11:50:25
Wait for Trig
Test 1

Chan
State

Sys
Conf

Term
Conf

*****
*****

LBK1, Remote Terminal

Menu Select Keys () – Located just below the display screen, these keys access the various menus.
On - Turns power ON to the LogBook. As an indication of power status, legible characters or the LCD backlight showsthat LogBook power is on.
Off - Turns power OFF to the LogBook. To prevent accidental shutdown, the user must confirm the “off” request if so
configured in the Terminal Configuration submenu.
Select/up/down - Moves the cursor up and down menu to select a particular parameter or function.
Edit/left/right - Views and selects among pre-programmed parameter values; Increases (right) or decreases (left) thenumeric quantity.
Enter - Resets parameter values as shown; performs current operation.
Cancel - Discards current operation and restores previous state as last saved.
Start/Stop - Starts an acquisition from idle, or stops an on-going acquisition.
Numeric keypad - Allows entry of signed (+/-) decimal (∗) numbers for setting various parameters.
Manual Trigger - Generates a manual trigger to begin a scan sequence.
Event Mark - Generates an event marker. LogBook records the exact time (to the nearest scan) at which the operator
presses the Event Mark button. These marks can be viewed on a PC with the use of a view program such as
eZ-PostView.

5-6

LBK and other non-DBK Options

919495

LogBook User’s ManualLBK1 Menu Map
The following table describes the LBK1 menus that become available via the soft-keys below the LCD
display panel. In general, you can scroll through menu parameters by using the Select-up/Select-down
keys and through parameter values by using the Edit-left/Edit-right keys. Selections are finalized by using
the Enter key; selections are discarded by using the Cancel key or by selecting another parameter.
LBK1 Menu Map
Menu ID Name/Type/Description
Opening screen with soft-key options for
Mainother menus on the bottom line. Other
Menu
screens can return here by selecting
Acq
Conf

Sys
State

Chan
State

Fields and Parameters
System Time - reports time registered by LogBook’s internal timer
Acquisition Status - status can be idle, armed, or triggered.

Main Menu at bottom right corner.
Acquisition Configuration(Read Only) Shows settings from LogView’s Acquisition Configuration window.
Defines basic trigger parameters using the following submenus.
Scan Rate
Clock Source - can be internal or external
Base Rate A (Hz) - can be off or set by LogView
Base Rate B (Hz) - can be off or set by LogView
Base Rate C (Hz) - can be off or set by LogView
Base Rate D (Hz) - can be off or set by LogView
Acq SetAcquisition Name - name of the configuration file (*.lvc) that is currently loaded(Acquisition Setup)
Number of Re-arms - infinite or number of repetitions until acquisition is stopped
PreT Conf
Scans - the number of scans before the trigger event that will be saved(Pre-Trigger Configuration)
Trig Conf
Source - can be immediately, manually, analog channel, digital channel(Trigger Configuration)
Date - to set Absolute TimeTime - to set Absolute Time
Retrigger - under absolute Time, set duration to next trigger
Channel - user label for analog and digital channels
Condition - can be rising or falling edge for analog or digital channel source
Threshold - a voltage value for analog channel source
Hysteresis - a voltage value for analog channel source
Stop On - can be manually, analog channel, digital channel
PostT Conf
(Post-Trigger Configuration)
Channel - user label for analog and digital channels
Scans - the number of scans before the trigger event that will be saved
Condition - can be rising or falling edge for analog or digital channel source
Threshold - a voltage value for analog channel source
Hysteresis - a voltage value for analog channel source
Arm Time - displays the arming time of the acquisition
Acq State(Acquisition State)
Acq State - shows acquisition status: waiting for trigger, armed, or triggered.
Read only; shows system status and
Pre-Trig Scans - lists the number of pre-trigger scans already completed.
resources.
Post-Trig Scans - lists the number of post-trigger scans already completed
Trigger Blocks - lists the number of trigger blocks already completed and storedwith current configuration file.
Disk Space Avail. - lists the number of bytes available on the PC-card.
Disk Space Used - lists the number of bytes saved to the PC-card.
CPU Usage - shows the percentage of the LogBook’s CPU that is currently being
used by the process.
Error State
Error Number - provides a number for error identification
Error String - identifies the string that contains the error
Error Count - lists the number of unread errors
Displays the error message.
Read Error
Channel Status(Read Only)
All channels are listed with their values
and units.
If multiple pages are used to list
channels, each page is numbered in
the format “page (1) of (3)”.

User Label - lists channels by user-designated labels
Reading - lists the latest reading received from that channel
Units - lists the dimensional units of the reading; e.g., Volts, PSI, DegC
The soft-keys in this menu are used as follows:
AnIN Chans- to display active analog channels and their current readings
DigIN Chans- to display active digital channels and their current readings
Calc Chans - to display calculated channels and their current values
GPS Chans - to display Global Positioning System Channels

This menu map is continued on the following page.

LogBook User’s Manual

919495

LBK and other non-DBK Options

5-7

LBK1 Menu Map (continued)
Menu ID Name/Type/Description
System Info
Sys
Conf

Set Time

Term
Conf

Terminal Configuration
Allows the user to set parameters for the
LBK1 terminal. These values are
saved in the LBK1’s non-volatilememory.

Fields and Parameters
Includes the following System Information:
Terminal Firmware Rev.
LogBook FPGA Rev.
LogBook OS Rev.
LogBook Serial Number
LogBook Model Number
DAC Option Card Installed (Yes or No)
Memory Option Size (in MB)
PC Card Size
Time - reports time registered by LogBook’s internal timer
Month - sets LogBook timer to current monthYear - sets LogBook timer to current year
Hour - sets LogBook timer to current hour
Minute - sets LogBook timer to current minute
Second - sets LogBook timer to current second
Contrast - sets display contrast from 1 to 25
Brightness - sets display brightness from 1 to 25
Key Sound - can be yes or no to confirm keystroke
Back Light - can be yes or no (not using the back light can conserve battery life)
Verify Power Off - can be yes (when off key is selected, a confirmation screen will
ask “power Off” with yes and no soft-keys) or no (selecting the Off key will
immediately turn off the LogBook)
Baud Rate - can select communication speed from listed options

LBK1 - Specifications
Operating Temperature: -20°C to 50°C
Connector: RJ-11
Display: LCD, 16 lines × 40 characters
Power: None required
Dimensions: 7.875 wide” × 4.375” long × 1.125” high; (200 × 111 × 29 mm)

5-8

LBK and other non-DBK Options

919495

LogBook User’s ManualLBK2, Four Channel Digital-to-Analog Output Option
The optional D/A output board contains four 16-bit, voltage-output, digital-to-analog converters with amaximum update rate of 100 kHz per channel. The board is intended for waveform generation, UUT
stimulus, and signal feedback. Each converter has a fixed, full-scale output of ±10 VDC. The board’s
operation must be programmed through LogView.
The D/A output board has been designed for operation into loads of >2000 Ω resistance with <100 pF of
parallel capacitance. The D/A board is stable with all capacitive loads; however, increased capacitive
loading will result in longer settling times.
Name: Analog Output Board
Output Voltage Range: ±10 VDC.
Voltage Resolution: (1 LSB): 305 µV

Offset Error: ±0.0045 V
Full Scale Error: ±0.01%
Settling Time For 20 Volt Step: <10 µs

The D/A output board is an edge-card design and plugs into a 30-pin SIMM socket.
If not factory-installed, the D/A board can be easily installed by the user as follows:

WARNING
Electric shock hazard. Turn off power to all system-connected devices prior toconnecting or disconnecting cables, or setting hardware configurations. Failure to
do so could result in electric shock or death, and equipment damage, even under
low-voltage conditions.

CAUTION
Perform the following procedure using ESD tools, containers, and procedures. Oneor more related components are sensitive to damage from electrostatic discharge.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Turn off system power.
Remove the LogBook’s top cover and locate CN4 (a 30-pin SIMM socket), see following figure.
To gain access to CN4, first remove the RAM memory board from CN5.
Using ESD precautions, remove the bypass board from CN4.
Using ESD precautions, insert the LBK2 analog output board into CN4. Note that the board andsocket are keyed to mate one-way-only, and will lock together when properly mated.
Using ESD precautions, replace the RAM memory board into CN5.
Replace the top cover and screws.
Turn on system power.
Notes:
CN4 and CN5 slots each have
two release clips that must be
depressed in order to releasecards.

The LBK2 Analog Output
Board inserts into the CN4 slot
on LogBook’s Motherboard.

LogBook Motherboard, CN4 Location Reference

LogBook User’s Manual

919495

LBK and other non-DBK Options

5-9

LBK2 - Specifications
Channels: 4
Connector: DB37 male, P3
Resolution: 16-bits
Maximum Offset Error: ±0.0045 V
Maximum Gain Error of Full-Scale: ±0.01%
Output Voltage Range: ±10 V
Maximum Output Current: 10 mA
Maximum Update Rate: 100 kHz all channels concurrently

5-10

LBK and other non-DBK Options

919495

LogBook User’s ManualRemote On/Off Switch and LED Indicator Options
The DB9 Terminal connector on LogBook/300 and LogBook/360 can be used toconnect a remote on/off switch and/or an LED indicator. If you are not using the
Terminal connector for another option, such as the LBK1 remote terminal, you may
find one of the following three remote options convenient.
Remote On/Off Switch and LED

What you will need:

You can use this option to power
your LogBook ON or OFF from aremote location. One push-andrelease of the button will power theunit on and the indicator LED willlight. A second push-and-releaseof the button turns the unit andindicator LED off.

(a) One “Momentary Contact” switch,contact rating: >5 ma (DC or AC)
Push-button style recommended.
(b) One Male DB9 connector with
twisted-wire, 24 gage or better(c) 1K ohm resistor*, rated > 0.125 W(d) LED rated at <50ma with operating
voltage <3 VDC

Push-buttons are available that havethe LED and resistor built into theswitch.

*You may substitute a 500 ohm resistor to
obtain a brighter LED display.
What you will need:

Remote On/Off Switch (no LED)You can use this option to power
your LogBook ON or OFF from aremote location. One push-andrelease of the button will power theunit on. A second push-and-releaseof the button turns the unit off.

(a) One “Momentary Contact” switch,contact rating: >5 ma (DC or AC)
Push-button style recommended.

Remote LED Indicator

What you will need:

You can use this option to indicate
when a remote LogBook is powered
ON or OFF.

(a) One Male DB9 connector with
twisted-wire, 24 gage or better(b) One Male DB9 connector with
twisted-wire, 24 gage or better(b) 1K ohm resistor*, rated > 0.125 W(c) LED rated at <50 ma with operating
voltage <3 VDC*You may substitute a 500 ohm resistor to
obtain a brighter LED display.

LogBook/300 Being Connected to a Remote Push-Button Switch and LED Indicator
LogBook User’s Manual

919495

LBK and other non-DBK Options

5-11

Remote Switch and LED Indicator - Specifications
Momentary Contact Switch: >5mA (DC or AC); push-button style recommended
Resistor: 1K ohm, rated at > 0.125 W
LED: <50 mA, operating voltage <3 VDC

5-12

LBK and other non-DBK Options

919495

LogBook User’s ManualGPS and Serial Device Data Collection

6

Applies to LogBook/360 Only

Introduction
The LogBook/360 has two serial ports to which RS-232 devices can be attached. Using the LogView interface,serial data channels can be described that allow the LogBook to collect data from the devices, convert them tochannel values, and store them synchronously with its analog and digital inputs.
Although the auxiliary serial ports are standard in the LogBook/360, the serial input software is sold separately as
option LogBook/GPS.
Use the following authorization code to enable the feature: ED7B55484273
LogBook/300 does not support serial device input.

LogBook/360 Connected to GPS Receiver and a Serial Device
Virtually any serial device that sources continuous ASCII data, including Global Positioning System (GPS) devices,
gas flow meters, and scales, is compatible. GPS devices conforming to the NMEA 0183 standard are supported
directly in the LogView interface, so no knowledge of the data format is necessary. The GPS receiver must bepurchased separately and is available from a variety of sources. For ease of operation, make sure the receivercomplies with the NMEA 0183 protocol standard.

LogBook User’s Manual

958396

GPS and Serial Device Data Collection

6-1

Serial Input Fundamentals
Every LogBook input and output is called a channel. When an input channel is enabled, the LogBook will sample
and save it at the specified frequency. To collect and save numeric data from serial devices, a serial channel must
be defined. Each serial channel defines a single number embedded in the ASCII serial input string sourced by theserial device. Each serial channel has an associated format string that provides the parsing and converting
instructions to the LogBook. Up to 16 serial channels can be defined within the LogView software application.
Terms
Serial channel

A serial channel is a LogBook data element, like an analog input channel, that can becollected and stored with the other analog and digital input data. A serial channel defines
a single numeric field within the serial data stream sourced by the serial device.

Serial input string

A serial input string is the ASCII data being transmitted by the serial device. Typically,
the serial input string contains several numeric and character fields, and is terminated bycarriage return (CR) and/or line feed (LF) characters.

Format string

A format string is a user-created character string that contains the instructions necessary
for the LogBook to parse out the desired field in the serial input string.

Capabilities and Limitations
Interface typeRS-232 devices.

Data types

The device must supply an ASCII sentence, an ASCII data string terminatedby a CR and/or LF. The device must transmit its data without any inducement.
Devices that require a data request command from the controller are not supported.

Serial input string size

The size of a terminated sentence cannot exceed 255 characters.

Number types

Integers (+/-32,768), floats (3.4E+/-38 with 6 digits of decimal precision), and character(+/-128) types are accepted.

Serial channel usage

Like all other input channels in the LogBook system, serial channels can be used inequations defining calculated channels and/or used in the definition of thetrigger or stop events.

Serial baud rate

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 38400, 57600, 115200.

GPS port

General serial devices can be attached to either port 1 and/or 2, but a GPS device canonly be attached to Port 1.

Synchronicity

The LogBook’s analog and digital input channels are synchronously sampled at the
specified rate(s) using an internal or externally supplied sample clock. Serial devices
provide data to the LogBook asynchronously to its sample clock. When a serial input
string is parsed and converted, its value is placed in temporary storage. When the sample
clock fires, the current value in temporary storage is scanned along with the analog anddigital input channels and written to the LogBook’s non-volatile PC-Card memory.
If the sample rate associated with the serial channel is slow relative to the transmission
speed of the serial device, the temporary storage may be updated several times between
recorded samples. If the sample rate of the associated serial channel is fast relative to thetransmission speed of the serial device, the temporary storage may be sampled and stored
many times without any new updates from the serial device.

Data validity

6-2

When the system is first armed the serial channel data may be invalid for an
undetermined number of scans. Until the serial device provides that which is required by
the serial channel definition, the associated serial channel will be invalid. For highsample rates, many scans may be executed before valid data is present on the serial
channels.

GPS and Serial Device Data Collection

958396

LogBook User’s ManualInstallation and Setup
Installing a New System
For new LogBook systems, perform the following steps to install.
Step 1

Follow the general instructions included with your
LogBook for installing your hardware and software.

Step 2

Launch LogView.

Step 3

Select File/Authorization…

Step 4Enter ED7B55484273, then click Apply Code.

Step 5Connect your serial device(s).

Step 6

Close and re-launch LogView.

Upgrading an Older System
When adding the GPS/Serial Input option as an upgrade to an older
LogBook system, perform the following steps:
Step 1

Use the Add/Remove Programs utility in the Windows
Control Panel to uninstall your current version of LogView.

Step 2Insert the upgrade CD. If Autorun is enabled, the setup
program will launch automatically. If it’s disabled, run
SETUP.EXE from the root directory of the CD.

Step 3In the opening window, select LogBook support and click
OK.

Step 4

Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.

Note:

It may be necessary to restart your computer when the setup
program is complete.

Step 5After restarting your computer, launch LogView.

Step 6

Select File/Authorization…

Step 7

Enter ED7B55484273, then click Apply Code.

Step 8Connect your serial device(s).

Step 9Close and re-launch LogView.

LogBook User’s Manual

958396

GPS and Serial Device Data Collection

6-3

Configuring an Acquisition
What you need to know about your non-GPS device
To successfully capture data sourced by a non-GPS device, you’ll need intimate operational knowledge about thedevice. Use the Operator’s Manual shipped with the device to collect information about the following:
Baud rate, parity,
stop bits, and databits

To successfully communicate with the serial device, the LogBook’s serial port(s)must be set up to match the RS-232 parameters of the serial device.

Data transmission
rate

Typically, serial devices send a block of ASCII data or an ASCII sentence(terminated by CR LF) on a periodic basis—once per second, for example. Knowing
this rate will allow you to set up your sample rate for the serial channel(s)intelligently. To capture every value transmitted by the serial device, set the sample
rate for the serial channel at about twice the rate of the serial data transmission rate.

Data string

To successfully parse and convert fields within the serial data string, complete
knowledge of the string format must be known. For each serial channel, a format
string must be created which perfectly describes the expected message. The
Windows’ Hyperterminal application is sometimes helpful for inspecting the serial
strings sourced by a device.

What you need to know about your GPS
The LogBook has direct support for all GPSs that conform to the NMEA 0183 protocol. A GPS of thiskind can be connected and operated without any knowledge of the communication or protocol parameters.
The included GPS support makes use of the NMEA 0183’s GGA message, yielding Longitude, Latitude,
Altitude, UTC time, and Quality of fix.
If additional GPS parameters are desired, serial channels can be defined to capture them, just likeparameters from general, non-GPS devices. To maximize flexibility, user-defined serial channels and predefined GPS channels can be used concurrently on the same GPS device. For example, the GPS Longitude
channel can be enabled concurrently with a user-defined serial channel that captures the heading data fromthe same GPS.
To capture user-defined parameters from the GPS, intimate knowledge of the GPS data strings is required.

6-4

GPS and Serial Device Data Collection

958396

LogBook User’s ManualConfiguration Setup Overview

Launch LogView
Setup Serial
Communications
Parameters (pg. 6-6)
Turn Channel On.
(pg. 6-6)

Select from:•
Longitude•
Latitude•
Altitude•UTC•
Quality(pg. 6-7)

Yes

Using
Pre-Defined
GPS-SpecificInputs ?
No
Select Data Type (6-7):• Integer• Float• Character

Repeat for eachdesired serial channel.

Create Format String(pg. 6-8)

Enter User Label or leave
default (pg. 6-6)
Enter Units or leave
default (pg. 6-6)
Select Sample Rates
A, B, C, or D (see the
LogView section)
Configure other acquisition parameters,e.g., trigger parameter, trigger andstop events (see the LogView section)
Download the acquisition setup to an
attached LogBook. (see the“Communication” and “Download”
sections of the LogView section)

Enable the Readings column in the
GPS/Serial configuration grid tovalidate your format strings (page 6-6)

LogBook User’s Manual

958396

Recommended forFirst-Time setup

GPS and Serial Device Data Collection

6-5

Setting up Serial Communication Parameters
To setup the serial communication parameters of either
or both RS-232 ports, open the Hardware
Configuration Window.
This window exposes the hardware configuration tree
used to configure DBK expansion cards and hardware
settings.
Selecting any of the 3 Serial ports at the bottom of
the tree exposes their settings on the right. The
bottom-most serial port is the LogBook
communication port used to connect the LogBook
to a PC or modem. The items labeled S1 and S2
are the 2 serial device input ports. On the
LogBook connector panel, the connectors for S1and S2 are marked “Serial GPS” and“Serial AUX”, respectively. The 1st port islabeled GPS because, if used, a GPS should only
be connected to this port. If a GPS is not being
used, any serial device can be connected to S1
and/or S2. The default configuration settings forS1 and S2 are designed for standard GPS
receivers. If you’re using a GPS on S1, leave thesettings in their default states. For general serial devices, the baud rate, data bits, parity, and stop bits settings
should all be set to match the serial device. The RTS Mode setting regulates the RS-232 handshaking. The Input
Buffer Full setting enables hardware handshaking. The Always On setting disables handshaking.
Once the settings for S1 and S2 have been entered, click OK to close the window.

GPS/Serial Input Channel Configuration
To configure a serial input or GPS channel, click the
GPS/Serial Input tool in the toolbar. This action will
expose the channel grid used to set up the desired serial
input channels.
Each row of the grid
represents a serial input
channel. Up to 16 serial
input channels can be
defined. As channels areneeded, enable them in
the On/Off column, thenselect the channel typefrom the drop down list.
The “Units” and “UserLabel” columns hold auser-entered string that isstored with the data fordata readability, but haveno effect on the acquisition.
The “Channel Type” and “Format String” columns define what will be read from the serial device and stored in
the associated LogBook channel. In the “Channel Type” column, both the serial port and data type are specified.
When an integer, character, or floating point input is selected, LogView will automatically insert the required
directive into the format string. The user can then add additional, optional formatting parameters, but the format
string must always end with the directive initially inserted by LogView or a directive of the same number type.
6-6

GPS and Serial Device Data Collection

958396

LogBook User’s Manual

The following table describes the available settings for Channel Type:
Parameter type

Setting

Description

Latitude Degrees

Latitude Degrees is an integer that varies from +/- 90 degrees. A positive
number represents the northern hemisphere while a negative number represents
the southern hemisphere.

Latitude Minutes

Latitude Minutes varies from 0 to 60 minutes with 4 digits of decimal precision
providing a distance resolution of 0.02 meters.

Longitude Degrees

Longitude Degrees is an integer that varies from +/- 180 degrees. A positive
number represents the western hemisphere while a negative number represents
the eastern hemisphere.

Longitude Minutes

Longitude Minutes varies from 0 to 60 minutes with a variable number of digitsof decimal precision, providing a distance resolution of 0.02 meters.

Altitude

Altitude varies from –11,000 to 21,767 meters with 0.5 meter resolution.

UTC Time

UTC Time varies from 0 to 86,399 seconds.

Quality of Fix

The Quality of Fix, provided by the receiver, varies from 0 to 8, providing
feedback as to the dependability of the fix information. 0 indicates an invalid
fix.

Device Type…
General purpose serial
deviceInteger

Any integer embedded in a string of ASCII serial data.

Time-of day parameters
for the LogBook’s
internal real-time clock

GPS-specific(on S1 only)

Float

Any floating point number embedded in a string of ASCII serial data.

CharacterAny single character embedded in a string of ASCII serial data.

mSeconds

Real-time clock milli-seconds ranging from 0 to 875.

Seconds

Real-time clock integer seconds ranging from 0 to 59.

Minutes

Real-time clock integer minutes ranging from 0 to 59.

Hours

Real-time clock integer hours ranging from 0 to 23.

Days

Real-time clock integer days ranging from 0 to 32767.

Each serial channel represents one and only one number or character. To acquire both Longitude and Latitude, forexample, two channels must be enabled and set, respectively. When collecting data from a non-GPS device, eachdesired parameter in the data [sent by the serial device] must occupy a unique channel. If the serial device supplies
three parameters and all three are to be collected, then three serial channels must be configured.
When a GPS or time-of-day (TOD) parameter is required, simply select the associated cell in the Channel Typecolumn of the grid, then select the desired parameter from the drop down list. When an integer, float, or characteris to be parsed from a serial input string, a format string must be formulated.

The simplest format string can be used if the serial device simply sends one parameter terminated by a
CR and/or LF. For example, a scale might send the following:+12.32<CR><LF>+13.23<CR><LF>+13.44<CR><LF>+12.65<CR><LF>
LogBook User’s Manual

958396

GPS and Serial Device Data Collection

6-7

In this case, the simple format string %f would instruct the LogBook to start at the 1st character in the serial input
string sentence. It would then begin the conversion to a floating point number until a character was encounteredthat could not be converted. If a %I, for integer, was used instead of %f,
the LogBook would record +12 instead of +12.32.

Format String Reference
The format string provides instructions to the LogBook’s internal parser allowing it to parse, then to convert
numerically a specified section of an ASCII string from a serial device. The format string contains directives for
accepting and rejecting parts of the string. Only one section of each ASCII string can be accepted and converted foreach serial channel.
The parsing and converting process begins when the LogBook senses the serial input string sentence, a string fromthe serial device that is terminated by a CR and/or LF. Each enabled Serial Channel will attempt to parse the entire
serial input string. To successfully parse and convert a number or character in a string, all of the characters up to
the desired field must be accounted for in the format string. The first character encountered that does not match theformat string will cause the parsing operation to fail with no conversion process. The serial channel associated witha failed parsing operation will remain unchanged.
Each format string contains directives to ignore all the characters except those of interest. A format string cancontain several optional “ignore” directives, but must contain one and only one “accept and convert” directive. The“accept and convert” directive must be the last item in the format string. A format string can contain any or all of
the following:
Formatdirective

Description

ExampleComment

The “%” character signifies the
beginning of a conversion directive.
“X” is a decimal integer specifying the
maximum length of the desired field,
while “y” is a character that specifies
the conversion type.

%3i
%c
%6f

Convert 1-3 character integer.

The “%” followed by the “*” character
signifies the beginning of a rejecting
directive. “X” and “y” are the same asabove.

%*7c%i%*i,%iReject 7 characters, convert an
integer.

White space

Tabs or spaces to be taken literally thenrejected.

%*i %fReject 1 integer and a space,convert a float.

Regularcharacters

Literal characters that are to bematched exactly in the serial input
string, then rejected$GPGGA,%fMatch and reject “$GPGGA,”
exactly, convert a float.

%Xy

%*Xy

Convert 1 character.
Convert 1-6 character float.

Reject 1 integer and a comma,
convert 2nd integer.

Format string examples:
LOAD:%f%*14c%i%*i,%*i,%*i,%f6-8

GPS and Serial Device Data Collection

Match the literal “LOAD:” then start converting a float.
Ignore the 1st 14 characters, then start converting an integer.
Ignore 3 integers followed by commas, then start converting a float.

958396

LogBook User’s Manual

The following table of examples shows how each format string operates on a series of serial input strings:
Serial input string from device

Format Strings Associated with three Serial Channels
LOAD:%f

LOAD:+12.345<CR><LF>+12.345

12,45,23,453.234<LF>

Failedattempting
match“LOAD:”.

11.1 22.2 33.3 44.4 55.5<CR>

Failedattempting
match“LOAD:”.

%*14c%i%*i,%*i,%*i,%f

Failed. After rejecting 14
characters, none were left.

Failed attempting to match 1st
integer in format string.

to

34. After skipping 14
characters, the last 2 numbers
were converted.

+453.234. Three integers
separated by commas
rejected.

to44. Converted first integer
after ignoring 1st 14
characters.

Failed after the 1st decimal
point was encountered. The
decimal point is neither an
integer nor a comma.

Valid Conversion Type Specifiersc

Any sequence of characters in the input stream of the length specified by the field width, or a single
character if no field width is specified, is matched.

dA decimal integer, consisting of an optional sign, followed by one or more decimal digits, is matched.
Leading white-space characters are skipped.

e, f, g A floating-point number, consisting of an optional sign ("+" or "-"), followed by one or more decimal
digits. The e specifier accepts scientific notation, i.e., 1.234E+12, while the f specifier accepts nonscientific notation values, i.e., 1.1234. The g specifier accepts either. Leading white-space characters
are skipped.
i

An optional sign, followed by an octal, decimal, integer, or hexadecimal constant is matched. An
octal constant consists of "0" and zero or more octal digits. A decimal constant consists of a non-zerodecimal digit and zero or more decimal digits. A hexadecimal constant consists of the characters"0x" or "0X" followed by one or more (upper- or lowercase) hexadecimal digits. Leading whitespace characters are skipped.

oAn octal integer, consisting of an optional sign, followed by one or more (zero or non-zero) octal
digits, is matched. Leading white-space characters are skipped.

s

A sequence of non-white-space characters is matched. Leading white-space characters are skipped.

u

An unsigned decimal integer, consisting of one or more decimal digits, is matched. Leading whitespace characters are skipped.

x

A hexadecimal integer, consisting of an optional sign, followed by an optional prefix "0x" or "0X,"
followed by one or more (upper- or lowercase) hexadecimal digits, is matched. Leading white-spacecharacters are skipped.

%

A conversion type specifier of "%" is treated as a single ordinary character that matches a single "%"character in the input data.

LogBook User’s Manual

958396

GPS and Serial Device Data Collection

6-9

Channel Type Selection Table
The following table shows the required channel type selection for each valid conversion type specifier. This
table does not apply to format directives using the reject indicator ("*"). The Sx in the table represents serial
ports S1 or S2.
Conversion TypeSpecifierDescription

c
d
e
f
g
i

charactersigned decimal integer
scientific notation floating point
non-scientific notation floating point
either e or f formats
optional signed octal, hexadecimal, or decimal
integer
octal integer
string (reject only)
unsigned decimal integer
hexadecimal integer
N/A

o
s
u
x
%

Required
Channel Type

Value Range

Sx_Char
Sx_Int
Sx_Float
Sx_Float
Sx_Float
Sx_Int–128 to 127–32,768 to 32,767
3.4E +/- 38 (7 digits)
3.4E +/- 38 (7 digits)
3.4E +/- 38 (7 digits)–32,768 to 32,767

Sx_IntN/A
Sx_Int
Sx_IntN/A–32,768 to 32,767
N/A
0 to 65535–32,768 to 32,767
N/A

GPS Examples
The following block of characters is an example of typical GPS receiver data:$GPRMC,011855,V,4022.1990,N,08249.1990,W,000.0,000.0,150470,006.7,W*6C$GPGGA,011855,4022.1990,N,08249.1990,W,0,00,,,M,,M,,*44$GPGSA,A,1,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,*1E$GPGSV,3,1,12,12,00,000,,14,00,000,,15,00,000,,16,00,000,*7D$GPGSV,3,2,12,17,00,000,,18,00,000,,19,00,000,,20,00,000,*7E$GPGSV,3,3,12,21,00,000,,22,00,000,,23,00,000,,24,00,000,*7E
The following example demonstrates how to retrieve information from the first few fields of the
Global Positioning System Fix Data (GGA) line:$GPGGA,011855,4022.1990,N,08249.1990,W,0,00,,,M,,M,,*44
Field Name

Field Description

Start of Sentence$

Address Field“aaccc” where “aa” is the talker identifier mnemonic (GP for Global
Positioning System) and “ccc” is the sentence formatter mnemonic (GGA for
Global Positioning System Fix Data)

Universal Time Coordinated (UTC)“hhmmss.ss” where “hh” is hours (0 to 23), “mm” is minutes (00 to 59) and“ss.ss” is seconds (00.00 to 59.99)

Latitude“ddmm.mm” where “dd” is degrees (0 to 89) and “mm.mm” is minutes(00.00 to 59.99)

Latitude N/S

N=North, S=South

Longitude“dddmm.mm” where “ddd” is degrees (0 to 179) and “mm.mm” is minutes(00.00 to 59.99)

Longitude E/W

E=East, W=WestThe format string of all serial input channels parsing information from the GGA line should start with “$GPGGA,”
so that all other serial input strings fail to match and are ignored.

6-10

GPS and Serial Device Data Collection

958396

LogBook User’s ManualOne method of parsing the UTC is to create a single channel that parses the entire UTC. In this case, the channel
type would be set to “Sx_Float” and the format string would be set to “$GPGGA,%f”. The value of the channel forthe example line above would be 11855. When parsing the UTC with this method, the channel value can jumpwhen the minutes or hours change (i.e. 11859 to 11900). In this case, “Sx_Int” cannot be used because the UTC
can be greater than 32767.
Another method to parse the UTC is to create individual hours, minutes, and seconds channels. The hours andminutes channels would be configured as “Sx_Int” with format strings of “$GPGGA,%2u” and“$GPGGA,%*2u%2u” respectively. Notice that the hours channel parses the first two characters while the minutes
channel throws the first two characters away by using the assignment suppression character (“*”), and parsing thenext two characters. The second channel would be configured for Sx_Float, so that fractions of seconds could beread, and would use a format string of “$GPGGA,%*4u%f”. Notice the seconds channel throws away the fourcharacters that make up the hours and minutes, and parses the remaining characters as a floating point number.
The ASCII value of a single character can be read using the %c format specifier. So the latitude hemispherecharacter “N” would be read as a decimal 78 (the ASCII value of N). If the channel type is set to “Sx_Char”, thevalue of the channel would be 78 but the LBK1 would display “N”.
The following table demonstrates various ways to parse the information contained in the GGA line.
Format String

Comments$GPGGA,%f

Converts the UTC to a float. The value may jump when minutes and hours change.

$GPGGA,%2u

Convert UTC hours only.

$GPGGA,%*2u%2u

Ignore UTC hours and convert UTC minutes.

$GPGGA,%*4u%f

Ignore UTC hours and minutes and convert seconds.

$GPGGA,%*f,%fIgnore UTC time and convert Latitude value. This value is in “ddmm.mm” format.
Channel value may jump when degrees change, and channel resolution may be large.

$GPGGA,%*f,%2u

Ignore UTC time and convert Latitude degrees only.

$GPGGA,%*f,%*2u%f

Ignore UTC time and Latitude degrees, convert floating point minutes.

$GPGGA,%*f,%*f,%c

Ignore UTC and Latitude, convert N/S character. The value will be recorded asdecimal equivalent of the ASCII “N” (XX decimal) or “S” (XX decimal).

$GPGGA,%*f,%*f,%*c,%f

Ignore UTC, Latitude, N/S character, convert Longitude in the format “ddmm.mm”.

$GPGGA,%*f,%*f,%*c,%3u

Ignore UTC, Latitude, N/S character, convert Longitude degrees only.

$GPGGA,%*f,%*f,%*c,%*3u,%fIgnore UTC, Latitude, N/S character, Longitude degrees, convert floating pointLongitude minutes only.

$GPGGA,%*f,%*f,%*c,%*f,%c

Ignore UTC, Latitude, N/S character, Longitude, convert E/W character. The value
will be recorded as decimal equivalent of the ASCII “E” (XX decimal) or “W” (XXdecimal).

If the serial input data is in fixed length format, the format string can be simplified by throwing a
number of characters away, rather than whole fields. For example, the Longitude Hemisphere
could be parsed using a format string of $GPGGA%*31c%c

LogBook User’s Manual

958396

GPS and Serial Device Data Collection

6-11

Using Serial Channels in Calculated Channels
Calculated channels and the LogBook’s ability to use them to define trigger and stop events is a very
powerful feature. This feature extends to the serial channels, which provide time-of-day data plus
information from GPS and general serial devices.
Example Application #1
An RS-232 scale is being used to measure the weight of a liquid fuel while a thermocouple measures engine
temperature. The LogBook is to trigger when the temperature exceeds 200F OR when fuel weight is lessthan 30Kg. This is represented by the calculation function seen in the following figure, where:(P1_CH00_2>200) Or (SER_CH00<30)
The calculated channel shown yields atrue/false output that is both recorded
and used as the trigger source.

Example Application #2
An oven is being monitored by several thermocouples attached to a LogBook. The LogBook is to trigger
whenever the temperature of the oven exterior is above 50C or at 9:00AM each day. The following
calculate channel equation yields a true/false output that is both recorded and used as the trigger source.
(P1_CH00_2 > 50) Or (SER_CH03 > 9)
The serial channel, SER_CH03, is assigned the Channel Type, TOD_Hour

6-12

GPS and Serial Device Data Collection

958396

LogBook User’s ManualExample Application #3
A GPS receiver is attached to the LogBook to record the present fix of the vehicle under test. The
LogBook is to trigger whenever the altitude is above 1000 meters and the fix quality is equal to 3. The
following calculate channel equation yields a true/false output that is both recorded and used as the trigger
source.
(SER_CH02 > 1000) And (SER_CH03 == 3)
SER_CH02 is the altitude from the GPS and SER_CH03 is the fix quality from the GPS.

LogBook/GPS - Specifications
Supported Protocol: NMEA 0183
Required NMEA 0183 Message: GGA
Electrical: RS-232
Connection: DB9 female connector
Baud Rate: 4800 Baud

LogBook User’s Manual

958396

GPS and Serial Device Data Collection

6-13

6-14

GPS and Serial Device Data Collection

958396

LogBook User’s Manual

Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler

7

What is a Modem?
A modem [MO(DULATOR) + DEM(ODULATOR)] is a device which can convert data to a form capable of beingtransmitted by wire and/or radio frequency to a second device of the same nature. The second device (also amodem) reconverts the data to its pre-transmission state. A pair of modems provides a convenient way for two
distant devices to communicate with each other.
Modems typically fall into one of two categories: (1) Telephone modems, and (2) Short-haul modems. This
chapter discusses the use of both types of modems with LogBook. To use a modem system with LogBook you
will need to refer to the documentation that was packaged with your modem, in addition to the applicablesection(s) of this chapter.
Telephone modems take advantage of existing
telephone lines to communicate with other suchmodems throughout the world.

Short-haul modems communicate via radio frequency
transmitter or cable to a reasonably close device, usually
within a distance of a 1 or 2 kilometers.

Telephone Modem Systems(See Section X, pg. 7-2)

Short-haul Modem Systems(See Section Y, pg. 7-9 )Verify that modem support has been enabled before proceeding through the setup steps.
Modem support can be enabled through an authorization process, as described below.

To verify that modem support is enabled:
1.

Run LogView.

2.

From LogView’s main window, pull-down theFile menu.

3.

Select Authorization. An Authorization box willappear.

4.

If modem support is disabled enter this code

ED7B55484273
This will enable all three features.
Checking that Modem Support is Enabled

LogBook User’s Manual

958896Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler

7-1Section X: Setting up a LogBook with a Telephone Modem
For a successful modem operation with LogBook, the following must be true:•

Modem support must be enabled via “authorization” from within LogView. (See pg. 7-1)
Use code: ED7B55484273 This code enables complete functionality for LogView.

•

The LogBook must become “modem capable” via a configuration file saved to its PC-Card.

•

The host PC must contain a LogBook configuration that is setup for dial-out capability.

•

One modem must be connected to or installed within a host PC.

•

One modem must be connected to the LogBook’s RS-232 (DB9 SERIAL COM) connector.

LogView makes no distinction between locally connected LogBooks and those that are attached via modem. For
example, LogView can upload data from a LogBook four feet away via serial port, or from a LogBook that is
located 2000 miles away via modem.
LogView provides a Windows Control Panel applet for configuring communication attributes of LogBook field
units. Note that a large number of LogBook connections can be assigned, each with its own set of communication
parameters and custom user name.
The configuration for LogBook’s PC-Card is made through LogView. The PC communication settings are madethrough the LogBook Control Panel configuration applet.
Once the configuration is complete you will need to download it to your PC-Card. This configuration download
can be made in either of two ways:(1) via the PC-Card socket in your PC or(2) through a parallel port connection to your LogBook.
Both methods are explained in the LogView section of this user’s manual.
Reference Note:
With modem support comes an application designed to automate the task of uploading data from one
or several LogBooks. This is application is referred to as the Upload Scheduler. It is discussed on
page 7-15.
The remainder of this section for telephone modems, explains the following steps:
X.1 – Configure the LogBook’s PC-Card Settings …… Page 7-3
X.2 – Set Up the Modem …… Page 7-4
X.3 – Physically Connect the Modem to the LogBook ……. Page 7-4
X.4 – Configure the PC’s Communication Parameters ……. Page 7-5
X.5 – Validate the Connection ……. Page 7-6

7-2

Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler

958896

LogBook User’s ManualStep X.1 – Configure the LogBook’s PC-Card Settings
1.

Start LogView.

2.

From the LogView toolbar, click the <Hardware Configuration> button.

3.

On the LogBook Hardware Configuration tree, select Serial COMM (see figure).

LogBook Hardware Configuration
Selecting Serial COMM and “Modem”
4.

Depending on your application, select either:• Modem (Note 1)• Cellular Modem• Connection at Fixed Baud (Note 2)
Note 1: If “Modem” is selected, a “Modem Init
String” text box will appear. (Right side
figure). The box allows you to enter
optional initialization command strings
that may be required for the modem tooperate properly.

Configuration Settings Panel Showing
Modem Initialization String Text Box¾

LogBook sends Hayes-compatible “auto-baud” and “auto-answer” commands
by default. If you choose to enter your own command settings, omit the “AT”
which is standard in Hayes command strings.

¾

Certain modems will not answer incoming calls unless they receive a command
to do so. Refer to your modem’s user’s manual for instructions.

¾

Every time the LogBook is powered-up, it will issue your specified command
string to the local modem.

Note 2: If “Connection at Fixed Baud” is selected, you will need to choose the desired baudrate from a pull-down list as indicated on page 7-11. The fixed baud rate connection
is typically used for short-haul modems, but can be used for telephone modems.
Never select a baud rate that is higher than that specified in your modem’s
documentation.

LogBook User’s Manual

5.

Close the LogBook Hardware Configuration window.

6.

Setup the other acquisition parameters, as desired.

7.

After the configuration is complete, download it to a PC-Card.
The download can be done in either of two ways:(a) with the PC-Card in the PC’s socket or(b) with the PC-Card in a LogBook through a parallel port connection.

958896Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler

7-3

The configuration download cannot be accomplished via a serial port connection.
This is because once the modem configuration is downloaded to the PC-Card in
the LogBook, the LogBook will no longer be capable of serial port
communication directly with the PC.
Reference Note:
If needed, refer to additional PC-card information in chapter 1 and in the LogView
section of this user’s manual.
8.

Upon completion of the download, close LogView.

Step X.2 – Set up the Modem
Desktop modems
Refer to your modem user’s manual to verify whether the device has any DIP-switches. If a DIP-switch ispresent and is set for DTR, set it to DTR Override. When DTR Override is set, the DR (Data Ready) LED
will light up after turning the modem on.
Note: It is recommended that your modem be set for “auto-answer,” if it is equipped with this feature.
Cellular modems
Refer to the user documentation that is specific to your modem. Set the cellular modem for auto answer.

Step X.3 – Physically Connect the Modem to the LogBook
1.

If your LogBook has the LBK/COM/422/485 option installed, verify that the option is set for RS-232
communication. The option is discussed in chapter 5. (See following note).
If you are using the LBK/COM/422/485 communications option you will need toensure that the option board is positioned on LogBook’s internal slot “CN8” suchthat the RS-232 communication mode is enabled. If your LogBook has the
LBK/COM/422/485 option and you are uncertain about the communication mode,
refer to chapter 5, LBK and other non-DBK options. The chapter section entitled
LBK/COM/422/485 explains how to set the communications option for RS-232.

2.

Connect the modem to the LogBook’s 9-pin Serial COM port. RS-232 mode is required.
9-Pin Connector
On LogBook

LogBook’s Serial COM
Pinout
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Modem Signals

Description
Not UsedRxD ------- connects to --- TxD
TxD --------connects to --- RxD
Not Used
Common ---connects to -- Common
Not Used
RTS ---------connects to ---CTSCTS ---------connects to --- RTS
Not Used

Modem Connection to LogBook’s Serial COM Port
3.

Turn power on to the LogBook and the modem. The LogBook will automatically send the specified
command string, if applicable.
Note that some modems have an LED to indicate that the device is in “auto-answer” mode and /or thatthe modem is being initialized.

7-4

Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler

958896

LogBook User’s ManualStep X.4 – Configure the PC’s Communication Parameters
1.

Launch the Control Panel applet by navigating as follows from the Windows’ Desktop:
Start⇒ Settings⇒ Control Panel⇒ LogBook Configuration

2.

From the “Add New Hardware” dialog box, select “Add Device.”3.

Select “Modem” from the Connection Type list.

4.

From the Device Connection list, select the modem that your PC will be using.

5.

In the Phone Number text field, enter the dial-up number of the modem that is connected to the
LogBook.

Adding a Modem as a Serial Device
6.

LogBook User’s Manual

Exit the LogBook Configuration applet.

958896Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler

7-5

Step X.5 – Validate the Connection
1.

Launch LogView.

2.

Select the newly configured LogBook as follows:(a) Expand the Device pull-down menu (see following figure).
(b) Choose “Select LogBook.” A Select LogBook box will appear.
(c) Pull-down the “Select LogBook’s” Device list and choose the applicable LogBook.

Selecting a LogBook from LogView’s Device Pull-down Menu
3.

Establish the connection by clicking the <Attach> button at the bottom of the Select LogBook screen.
At this point, LogView will attempt to dial-out and connect to the remote LogBook. If you are close
to the remote LogBook, you should see the LogBook’s local modem provide feedback, indicating that
it is being called. Soon after, the LogBook’s local modem should pick up the call. Once thecommunication link has been established, the LogView screen will provide additional feedback.

7-6

Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler

958896

LogBook User’s Manual

LogBook and Telephone Modem States
When LogBook is powered-on, software checks for a powered modem that is attached to the serial port.
If a modem is not detected, the check is repeated once a minute until either:(a)(b)

the modem is detected, ora serial communications connection is established.

Modem Detected
Once the LogBook detects the presence of a modem, it sends a series of AT commands to set the modem to an
initial auto-answer state. The LogBook will check to see if the modem is in the auto-answer mode approximately
once per minute, until the connection is established. This method provides for modem recovery, for example, if themodem were to be powered-off, then on again.
LogBook software processes messages received from the modem until RING and then CONNECT messages arereceived. This means the connection with the Host has been established. The session is terminated when the Host
hangs up and LogBook receives the message, NO CARRIER. At this point, the initialization procedure isscheduled with a five-second delay. This delay gives the modem time to drop the connection and return to its idle
state. The LogBook checks for the auto-answer state once a minute when waiting for the next session.
Modem Not Detected, Serial Connection Established
In situations in which a modem is not detected, but a serial connection is established, all modem activities are
suspended and will not take up any of the system’s processing time.

If the instructions for telephone modems were carefully followed but failed to work, set up the
LogBook using the instructions for short-haul modems. These begin on page 7-9.

LogBook User’s Manual

958896Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler

7-7

7-8

Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler

958896

LogBook User’s ManualSection Y: Setting up a LogBook with Short-Haul Modems
For a successful modem operation with LogBook, the following must be true:•

Modem support must be enabled via “authorization” from within LogView. (See pg. 7-1)
Use code: ED7B55484273 This code enables complete functionality for LogView.

•

The LogBook must become modem capable for “connection at a fixed baud rate” via aconfiguration file saved to its PC-Card.

•

The host PC must contain a LogBook configuration that is setup for dial-out capability.

•

One modem must be connected to or installed within a host PC.

•

One modem must be connected to the LogBook’s RS-232 (DB9 SERIAL COM) connector.

A PC and LogBook can communicate over relatively long distances via short-haul modems. Although thesemodems can be connected by cable, the more popular versions make use of radio frequency (RF) communications
to eliminate the need for a cable between the PC and LogBook.
From the standpoint of the PC and LogBook, a communication link via short-haul modems looks exactly like aconnection made via standard serial port. In other words, the use of short-haul modems is transparent to the PC and
LogBook. This “transparent aspect” is not true for telephone type modems.

Short-haul Modems, Cable TypeShort-haul Modems, Radio-Frequency Transmitter TypeThe configuration for LogBook’s PC-Card is made through LogView. The PC communication settings are madethrough the LogBook Control Panel configuration applet.
Under default conditions, when the PC attempts to communicate with the LogBook via its serial port, the LogBook
will initiate an auto-baud sequence that adopts the baud rate of the PC.
Short-haul modems are typically unable to properly negotiate the LogBook’s auto-baudsequence on the RS-232 port, so the LogBook will need to be setup in fixed baud mode.

Once the configuration is complete you will need to download it to your PC-Card. This configuration download
can be made in either of two ways:(1) via the PC-Card socket in your PC or(2) through a parallel port connection to your LogBook.
Both methods are explained in the LogView section of this user’s manual.
LogBook User’s Manual

958896Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler

7-9

Reference Note:
With modem support comes an application designed to automate the task of uploading data from one
or several LogBooks. This is application is referred to as the Upload Scheduler. It is discussed on
page 7-15.
The remainder of this section for short-haul modems, explains the following steps:
Y.1 – Configure the LogBook’s PC-Card Settings …… Page 7-11
Y.2 – Set up the Modem …… Page 7-12
Y.3 – Physically Connect the Modem to the LogBook ……. Page 7-12
Y.4 – Configure the PC’s Communication Parameters ……. Page 7-13
Y.5 – Validate the Connection ……. Page 7-13

7-10

Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler

958896

LogBook User’s ManualStep Y.1 – Configure the LogBook’s PC-Card Settings
1.

Start LogView.

2.

From the LogView toolbar, click the <Hardware Configuration> button.

3.

On the LogBook Hardware Configuration tree, select Serial COMM (see figure).

LogBook Hardware Configuration
Selecting Serial COMM and “Connection at Fixed Baud”
4.

Select Connection at Fixed Baud. In the resulting Configuration Settings panel, select the desiredbaud rate (following figure).
Do not enter a baud rate value that exceeds the maximum baud rate, as specified inyour short-haul modem’s user documentation.

Adjusting the Baud Rate for the “Connection at Fixed Baud Rate” Setting
Note: After this configuration has been downloaded to the LogBook, serial communication canbe performed through the modems. Serial communication can also be made via a direct
serial connection between the PC and LogBook, as long as the baud rates in the PC and
LogBook match.

LogBook User’s Manual

5.

Close the LogBook Hardware Configuration window.

6.

Setup the other acquisition parameters, as desired.

7.

After the configuration is complete, download it to a PC-Card. The download can be done ineither of two ways:(a) with the PC-Card in the PC’s socket or(b) with the PC-Card in a LogBook through a parallel port connection.
958896Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler

7-11

The configuration download cannot be accomplished via a serial port connection. This isbecause once the modem configuration is downloaded to the PC-Card in the LogBook, the
LogBook will no longer be capable of serial port communication directly with the PC.
Reference Note:
If needed, refer to additional PC-card information in chapter 1 and in the LogView section ofthis user’s manual.
8.

Close LogView.

Step Y.2 – Set up the Modem
For many short-haul modems, it is necessary to configure one modem as the local modem (attached to thePC) and one modem as the remote modem (attached to the LogBook). In some cases the setup is performedby setting hardware switches on the devices and it others it is performed via software commands.
Some modems require the user to setup the serial parameters; e.g., baud rate, stop bits, andparity. Make sure these match the setup of the communications parameters that are
selected in the LogBook Configuration control panel applet.
For information on how to perform these setup operations, refer to the instructions supplied with yourmodems.

Step Y.3 – Physically Connect the LogBook to the Modem
1.

If your LogBook has the LBK/COM/422/485 option installed, verify that the option is set for RS-232
communication. The option is discussed in chapter 5. (See following note).
If you are using the LBK/COM/422/485 communications option you will need toensure that the option board is positioned on LogBook’s internal slot “CN8” suchthat the RS-232 communication mode is enabled. If your LogBook has the
LBK/COM/422/485 option and you are uncertain about the communication mode,
refer to chapter 5, LBK and other non-DBK options. The chapter section entitled
LBK/COM/422/485 explains how to set the communications option for RS-232.

2.

Connect the modem to the LogBook’s 9-pin Serial COM port. Refer to your modem instruction
manual for connection issues, recommended configurations, and cable types.
9-Pin Connector
On LogBook

LogBook’s Serial COM
Pinout
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Modem Signals

Description
Not UsedRxD ------- connects to --- TxD
TxD --------connects to --- RxD
Not Used
Common ---connects to -- Common
Not Used
RTS ---------connects to ---CTSCTS ---------connects to --- RTS
Not Used

Modem Connection to LogBook’s Serial COM Port
3.

7-12

Turn power on to the LogBook and the modem.

Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler

958896

LogBook User’s ManualStep Y.4 – Configure the PC’s Communication Parameters
1.

Launch the Control Panel applet by navigating as follows from the Windows’ Desktop:
Start⇒ Settings⇒ Control Panel⇒ LogBook Configuration

2.

From the “Add New Hardware” dialog box, select“Add Device.”3.

Select Serial Port from the Connection Type pulldown list (following figure).

4.

From the Device Connection pull-down list, selectthe COMx, where x is the number of the serial
communication port that the modem will be using.

5.

Click the Port Settings tab.

Adjusting Port Settings
6.

In the Bits per Second field, select the baud rate of the LogBook and modems (see previous
figure).

7.

In the Flow Control field, select None or Hardware, according to the following criteria:• If using a cable with handshake lines, select None
• If your modems are not setup for hardware handshaking, select None
• All other instances, select Hardware.

8.

Exit the LogBook Configuration control panel applet.

Step Y.5 – Validate the Connection

LogBook User’s Manual

1.

Launch LogView.

2.

Select the newly configured LogBook as follows:(a) Expand the Device pull-down menu (see following figure).
(b) Choose “Select LogBook.” A Select LogBook box will appear.
(c) Pull-down the “Select LogBook’s” Device list and choose the applicable LogBook.

958896Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler

7-13

Selecting a LogBook from LogView’s Device Pull-down Menu
3.

Establish the connection by clicking the <Attach> button at the bottom of the Select LogBook
screen.
At this point, LogView will attempt to dial-out and connect to the remote LogBook. If you areclose to the remote LogBook, you should be able to see the LogBook’s local modem provide
feedback, indicating that it is being called. Soon after the LogBook’s local modem should pick up
the call. Once the communication link has been established the LogView screen will provide
additional feedback.

7-14

Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler

958896

LogBook User’s ManualWhat is the “Upload Scheduler” and how is it used?
The Upload Scheduler is an independent application that allows the user to configure upload events on one
or more LogBooks. To avoid waiting for a lengthy upload to complete, the Scheduler can be configured toperform the upload during off-hours. For example, three upload events could be configured in the
Scheduler, each for an upload of data at a different hour when the equipment is unattended. The Upload
Scheduler can save valuable time by performing such uploads; especially in cases where modem-connected
LogBooks are operating at slow baud rates.
If the Upload Scheduler is disabled, you must enter a valid authorization code as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Open LogView.
From LogView’s Control Window, select the File Pull-Down menu.
Select Authorization. The LogView Authorization dialog box appears.
Enter ED7B55484273 to enable the Upload Scheduler. Modem Support and
GPS Support will also be enabled.

LogView Authorization Dialog Box
For applications that require continuous data collection, the Upload Scheduler can periodically upload thedata to a local PC, making space on the LogBook’s PC-Card memory for more data. For a continuous
acquisition, each upload creates a new file called a data segment. LogView contains a utility to merge
segments, or to concatenate (link) them in one continuous file. Merging and concatenating are discussed
in the LogView section of this manual.

The Upload Scheduler automates the process of uploading data from one or many LogBooks.
In the above example, the Scheduler automatically initiates a session with each LogBook at the specified
time and uploads the available data. When the user arrives in the morning, all the data is immediately
available for inspection on the PC’s hard drive.

LogBook User’s Manual

958896Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler

7-15

A scheduled event can be configured to execute only one time, or periodically from Begin Schedule time to
Stop Schedule time. Periodic configurations can be made for uploads every hour, day, week, or month,without operator intervention.
If the scheduled upload should fail for any reason, LogView will retry the upload the number of times
indicated in the Retry field. These attempts are initiated at the duration indicated in the time in field. The
following figure shows that there will be 20 retry attempts. A retry will occur every 30 seconds (until the
upload is successful).

Upload events can execute once or periodicallyAn “active” Scheduler window is depicted in the following figure. The image has been split so it could beshown in its entirety at its present scale.

Active Upload Scheduler (split for complete image)
When the Upload Scheduler is activated, a Clock/LogBook icon appears in the
Windows Desktop System Tray, as shown in the figure at the left.
System Tray

7-16

Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler

Note: If the Upload Scheduler is active upon computer shutdown, it willautomatically activate when the computer is restarted.

958896

LogBook User’s ManualSection of Desktop Showing:Upload Status Window (normal and minimized states) and the System Tray
Each time the Upload Scheduler initiates an upload from LogBook, the application creates a minimized
Upload Status window (see previous figure). The Upload Status window provides schedule-related
information, such as upload start time, file destination, and time remaining. This window also states when
an upload fails; and when a “retry” will be attempted.
The Upload Scheduler saves a report of all its activities to the log file. You can view the log file byclicking Upload Scheduler’s “Show Log” button, or by selecting “Show Log” menu item in the Schedulepull-down menu.

Log File in WordPad Default
By default, the Upload Scheduler opens the log file in WordPad. You can choose to open the log file inother applications using the Schedule pull-down menu, Set LogViewer menu item.
The log file will be located in the \log subdirectory of the LogView install directory. The Upload
Scheduler will generate another log file as soon as the size of the current log file reaches 1MB. The
Upload Scheduler will delete the oldest log file from the \log directory when the number of log files
exceeds 10.
The Upload Scheduler uploads all binary data to the subdirectory \data in the LogView installation
directory.

LogBook User’s Manual

958896Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler

7-17Frequently Asked Questions
Q: I’ve tried to attach the Logbook after configuring the Serial Port Fixed Baud Rate Setup for the device:
LogBook Serial Fixed. It did not connect. What should I do?
A: Try the following:(a) Turn OFF the LogBook, then restart it to initialize the configuration.
(b) Verify that the proper RS232 cable is connected.
(c) Verify that the configuration in the LogBook Control Panel Applet matches that of theconfiguration downloaded to the LogBook.
(d) Verify that the Serial Ports (on both the LogBook and on the PC) work.
Q: I’ve tried to attach the Logbook after configuring the Serial Port Fixed Baud Rate Setup for the device:
LogBook Modem. It did not connect. What should I do?
A: Try the following:(a) Turn OFF the LogBook, then restart it to initialize the configuration.
(b) Verify that the proper 9-pin cable is connected to the LogBook from the modem.
(c) Verify that the proper 9-pin cable is connected to the PC from the modem.
(d) Verify that the modem is connected to the intended hardware, e.g. LogBook/PC, remote/receiver.
(e) Verify that the configuration in the LogBook Control Panel Applet matches that of theconfiguration downloaded to the LogBook.
(f) Verify that the Serial Ports (on both the LogBook and on the PC) work.

7-18

Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler

958896

LogBook User’s ManualInformation for Advanced Users
The following information is not intended for the typical user; but is provided for possible use by advanced users.
LbkTapi.dll is used to service the modem connection. It is called through Lbk.dll and LbkXport.dll.
Exported functions are the same as for the other connection types and include:- lbkTAPIOpen - opening the device.
- lbkTAPIClose - closing the device.
- lbkTAPIOutput - sending data.
- lbkTAPIEnter - receiving data.
- lbkTAPIOnline - verify device is online.

When a Device Opens, the System:
1. Opens a connection status dialog box.
2. Verifies TAPI compatibility (tapi.dll is part of the installation).
3. Checks that the modem is present and ready.
4. Calls the remote modem.
5. Waits for the ring back.
6. Negotiates connection speed and other parameters.
7. Sets the connection handle and returning connection status.
8. Closes the connection status dialog box (that was opened in step 1).
Note: Connection dialog will display text corresponding to each status phase.
Note: At any time during the connection process, you can terminate the call by clicking the Cancel button (in theConnection Status dialog box). In this case, the lbkTAPIOpen function will return the corresponding error:
ERR_TAPIOPEN_CANCELED_BY_USER.
In addition to cancellation by the user, a connection could fail because of the following:- busy signal- no dial tone
- modem offline- wrong number- remote modem not in auto-answer mode
- remote LogBook offline
In these cases, the error is indicated by connection dialog, and returned to the calling application.
Note: Closing the device includes dropping the call and freeing all modem resources.

LogBook/Modem - Specifications
Supported Modems: Hayes-Compatible
Maximum Baud Rate: 115K baud

LogBook User’s Manual

958896Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler

7-19

7-20

Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler

958896

LogBook User’s ManualCE Compliance8

Overview ...... 8-1
CE Standards and Directives ...... 8-1
Safety Conditions ...... 8-2
Emissions/Immunity Conditions ...... 8-3
CE Enhancements for Existing Products ...... 8-3
Edge Guards for DBK5, DBK8, and DBK44 ...... 8-3
DBK41/CE ...... 8-3
BNC Connectors for CE Compliance ...... 8-4

Overview
CE standards were developed by the European Union (EU) dating from 1985 and include specifications
both for safety and for EMI emissions and immunity. Now, all affected products sold in EU countries mustmeet such standards. Although not required in the USA, these standards are considered good engineering
practice since they enhance safety while reducing noise and ESD problems.
In contracted and in internal tests, most of our products met the required specifications. Products that were
not originally in compliance were redesigned accordingly. In some cases, alternate product versions, shieldplates, edge guards, special connectors, or add-on kits are required to meet CE compliance.
CE-compliant products bear the “CE” mark and include a Declaration of Conformity stating theparticular specifications and conditions that apply. Test Records and supporting documentationthat validate compliance are kept on file at the factory.

CE Standards and Directives
The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) directives specify two basic requirements:
1. The device must not interfere with radio or telecommunications.
2. The device must be immune from electromagnetic interference from RF transmitters etc.
The standards are published in the Official Journal of European Union under direction of CENELEC(European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization). The specific standards relevant to LogBook
or Daq device equipment are listed on the product’s Declaration of Conformity and include:
CISPR22:1985; EN55022:1988 (Information Technology Equipment, Class A for commercial/industrialuse); and EN50082-1:1992 for various categories of EMI immunity.
The safety standard that applies to LogBook and Daq device products is EN 61010-1 : 1993 (Safety
Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use, Part 1: General
Requirements). Environmental conditions include the following:

LogBook User’s Manual•indoor use•

altitude up to 2000 m•

temperature 5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F)•

maximum relative humidity 80% for temperatures up to 31°C (87.8°F) decreasing linearly
to 50% relative humidity at 40°C (104°F)•

mains supply voltage fluctuations not to exceed ±10% of the nominal voltage•

other supply voltage fluctuations as stated by the manufacturer•transient over-voltage according to installation categories (over-voltage categories) I, II and III
For mains supply, the minimum and normal category is II.

•

pollution degree I or II in accordance with IEC 664

949297

CE Compliance8-1

For clarification, terms used in some Declarations of Conformity include:•

pollution degree: any addition of foreign matter, solid, liquid or gaseous (ionized gases) thatmay produce a reduction of dielectric strength or surface resistivity. A pollution degree I has
no influence on safety and implies: the equipment is at operating temperature with noncondensing humidity conditions; no conductive particles are permitted in the atmosphere;warm-up time is sufficient to avert any condensation or frost; no hazardous voltages areapplied until completion of the warm-up period. Pollution degree II implies the expectationof occasional condensation.

•

overvoltage (installation) category: classification with limits for transient over-voltage,
dependent on the nominal line voltage to earth. Category I implies signals without hightransient values. Category II applies to typical mains power lines with some transients.

Safety Conditions
Users must comply with all relevant safety conditions listed in the Declarations of Conformity and in theuser documentation. This manual, LogBook, and Daq device hardware use the following Warning andCaution symbols:(If you see these symbols on a product, carefully read the related information and be alert to the possibilityof personal injury).
This warning symbol is used in this manual or on the equipment to warn of possible
injury or death from electrical shock under noted conditions.
This warning/caution symbol is used to warn of possible personal injury or equipment
damage under noted conditions.
LogBook and Daq device products contain no user-serviceable parts; refer all service to qualified
personnel.
The specific safety conditions for CE compliance vary by product; but general safety conditions
include:8-2

CE Compliance•

The operator must observe all safety cautions and operating conditions specified in the
documentation for all hardware used.

•

The host computer and all connected equipment must be CE compliant.

•

All power must be off to the device and externally connected equipment before internal access tothe device is permitted.

•

Isolation voltage ratings: do not exceed documented voltage limits for power and signal inputs.
All wire insulation and terminal blocks in the system must be rated for the isolation voltage in use.
Voltages above 30 Vrms or ±60 VDC must not be applied if any condensation has formed on thedevice.

•Current and power use must not exceed specifications. Do not defeat fuses or other over-current
protection.

949297

LogBook User’s ManualEmissions/Immunity Conditions
The specific immunity conditions for CE compliance vary by product; but general immunity conditions
include:• Cables must be shielded, braid-type with metal-shelled connectors. Input terminal connections areto be made with shielded wire. The shield should be connected to the chassis ground with the
hardware provided.
•

The host computer must be properly grounded.

•

In low-level analog applications, some inaccuracy is to be expected when I/O leads are exposed to
RF fields or transients over 3 or 10 V/m as noted on the Declaration of Conformity.

CE Enhancements for Existing ProductsThis section describes three CE enhancements.
•••

DBK41/CE
Edge Guards for the DBK5, DBK8, and DBK44
BNC Connectors for CE compliance

Edge Guards for DBK5, DBK8, and DBK44
A plastic barrier attached to the end of a DBK card helps prevent access to leads, and to live circuits.
The edge guards attach to DBKs (see figure below) that are mounted in a DBK41/CE, with EMI shieldplates. The access slot allows insulated wires to pass through the barrier.

DBK41/CEThe DBK41/CE includes 3 variations of EMI shield plates that attach to the DBK41 enclosure. Besides
acting as an electrical safety barrier, these shields reduce electromagnetic interference (EMI).
Note: The CE kit is included with the DBK41/CE. It can be purchased as an optional accessory for use
with DBK41.

LogBook User’s Manual

949297

CE Compliance

8-3

BNC Connectors for CE Compliance
Exposed BNC connectors can receive static charges, which can enter the board’s circuitry, resulting in
ESD damage. To comply with CE standards, BNC connectors must be shielded from high-voltage sources
such as static charges.

Some points:•

Cable and connector requirements are stated in the product’s Declaration of Conformity.

These are typically special coaxial cables with insulated end-connectors and rubber O-rings,
for example, cable kit p/n 418-0800.

•

PVC dust caps (p/n CN-96) must cover all unused BNC connectors.

•

Properly installed connectors and dust caps will cover the entire surface of the BNC,

i.e., no BNC metal will be exposed.

8-4

CE Compliance

949297

LogBook User’s Manual

LogView

Software Reference
Authorization Code*

Understanding LogView…… LV-1

View Menu…… LV-29

Modes of LogView Operation…… LV-2

Hardware Configuration…… LV-29
Analog Input Channel Configuration…… LV-30
Digital and Counter Input Channel Configuration…… LV-34
Output Channels Configuration…… LV-35
Serial / GPS Channels (LogBook/360 Only)….. LV- 36
Calculated-Channel Configuration…… LV-36

Setup…… LV-2
Monitor…… LV-2
System Management…… LV-3
Communication…… LV-3

LogView Features and Capabilities… LV-4
Software User-Interface…… LV-5

Equation Assistant ….. LV-37
Bitwise Operators …… LV-39
Logical Operators …… LV-39
Examples of Calculated Channels…… LV-40

Control Window (Toolbar and Pull-Down
Menus) …… LV-5
Spreadsheet Model…… LV-6
Help Box …… LV-7
User Input…… LV-7

Acquisition Configuration…… LV-42
Trigger Parameters Setup …… LV-42
Scan Rate Setup …… LV-43
Event Marking/Time Stamping…… LV-44

File Management...... LV-8
File Organization...... LV-8
Data File Generation...... LV-9
Naming Format for Data Files...... LV-9
Customizing the File Name...... LV-10

Preferences…… LV-45

Device Menu…… LV-47
Select PC-Card...... LV-47
Select LogBook…… LV-47
Attach…… LV-47
Break…… LV-47
Arm Acquisition…… LV-47
Stop Acquisition…… LV-47
LogBook Monitor …… LV-48
Explorer…… LV-49

Procedures…… LV-12
Flowchart of a Simple Acquisition…. LV-12
Using an Attached LogBook…… LV-12
Using LogBook “Unattached”…… LV-14
Simple Data Logging…… LV-14
Setting Up DBK Cards…… LV-16
Using Multiple Timebases…… LV-17
Using Digital 2-Point Calibration…… LV-20
Using Digital Outputs As Alarms…… LV-21
Using Exception Capturing…… LV-23

Menu Descriptions…… LV-24
File Menu…… LV-24
New…… LV-24
Open…… LV-24
Save/Save As…… LV-25
Upload…… LV-25
Download/Download As…… LV-27
Configuration Report…… LV-27
About LogView …… LV-28
Authorization* …… LV-28
Exit…… LV-28

ED7B55484273

Tools Menu…… LV-50
Convert Binary Data…… LV-50
Merging Binary Data…… LV-52
View Data …… LV-53

Indicators Menu…… LV-54
Bar Graph Meters…… LV-54
Analog Meters…… LV-54
Digital Meters…… LV-55
Meters Configuration…… LV-55
Enable Input Reading Column…… LV-57
Start (or Stop) All Indicators…… LV-57* Use code: ED7B55484273 to authorize complete functionality ( see page LV-28).

Understanding LogView
LogView provides for easy setup and operation of LogBook. LogView’s flexibility can handle virtually any dataacquisition environment. The graphical Windows interface can display a variety of spreadsheets, dialog boxes,
graphs, charts, and meters; and accepts user input from a mouse and keyboard. The easy-to-learn interface does not
require programming or the configuration block diagrams.
It is important to understand the central role of the PC-Card in LogBook/LogView operation. When LogBook
operates in a stand-alone mode (not attached to the PC), LogView must download the system and acquisition setup
files to a PC-Card. The PC-Card must then be manually transferred to LogBook. Later LogBook’s PC-Card must betransferred back to the PC for uploading. When LogBook and PC are attached in direct communication, LogView candownload to [or upload from] LogBook in real time via the communications link.

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-1

Modes of LogView Operation
The next figure outlines LogView’s functional modes to help you visualize what LogView can do. Thisfunctional organization is not the same as the menu organization.

Setup
System Setup includes the hardware, the channels in the scan, and the triggering. Before data acquisition
can begin, all setups must be complete and the resulting setup file downloaded to the PC-Card in LogBook.
• Hardware Configuration asks you to set the software parameters to match your hardware. For some
DBKs, you may need to adjust the DBK’s jumpers and DIP switches—or at least verify that the
LogView software setting matches the DBK hardware setting (page LV-29).
• Channel Setup pertains to using LogView to set the different types of channel parameters. These
include label. On/off, range, units, format, user scaling, storage rates, and DBK software parameters.
The types of channels that are set up through LogView are: Analog Input (page LV-30), Digital Input(page LV-34), Output Channels (page LV-35), GPS/Serial Input (page LV-36), and Calculated
Channels (page LV-36). The flexibility of the Calculated Channel allows you to create a virtualchannel based on math and logic functions of real channels (analog and digital), other virtualchannels, and arbitrary numerical values.
• Acquisition Configuration asks you to determine when, how often, and for how long to get datareadings. Trigger/pre-trigger/post-trigger conditions and timebases are discussed on page LV-42.
• System Calibration allows you to perform 1-point or 2-point calibrations to fine-tune systemaccuracy.
Monitor• Monitor Acquisition. In real-time, LogView can display system parameters and channel values in a
spreadsheet style. If so desired, readings can be formatted into bargraphs, analog meters, and digitalindicators (page LV-54).
• LogBook Monitor shows the status of the current acquisition and the LogBook system (page LV48).
• Programmed Digital Outputs Used As Alarms. The monitoring function can be automated via
calculated channels and digital outputs to engage alarms when pre-defined conditions occur.
• Display Recorded Data. allows you to graphically view previously recorded data for analysis andcomparison via a post-acquisition “view” program. The applicable “view” application is covered by
PDF documentation that is automatically installed onto your PC’s hard-drive as a part of LogBook
product support, during software installation.
LV-2

LogView

989592

Software ReferenceSystem Management
LogView allows you to manage aspects of an acquisition in progress and file saving/conversion:• Direct Acquisition Controls of LogBook include manual triggering and setting reference marks(via LogBook Monitor, page LV-48) and starting/stopping an acquisition. In these ways, LogView
gives you immediate access to LogBook operation.
• File Management includes managing data/configuration files and converting data file formats. The
LogView Explorer window allows you to manage files on the PC-Card.
Communication
Communication between LogView and LogBook is actually between the PC and a PC-Card. During thecommunication, the PC-Card can reside in a LogBook for direct (attached) communication or in the
PC’s PC-Card socket for indirect (unattached) communication (and later manually transferred to
LogBook).
Whether direct or indirect, communication involves downloading and uploading:• Downloading sends the acquisition setup file (created in LogView’s Setup mode) to LogBook’s
PC-Card. LogBook uses the setup file to run the acquisition (also needs logbook.sys).
• Uploading receives recorded data from LogBook’s PC-Card. After the data has been collected andtemporarily saved on LogBook’s PC-Card, the data must be uploaded to LogView for processing,conversion, use in other programs, and/or archival saving.
In the Direct (Attached) Communication mode, communication occurs through the electronic connection(cabling via serial or parallel port). While attached, LogBook can do 2-point calibration, look at current
readings, and download/upload without handling the PC-Card.
Note: In some cases, data transfer may be faster by placing LogBook’s PC-Card in the computer’s
PC-Card socket and bypassing the attached communication.

In the Indirect (Unattached) Communication mode, no electrical connection exists between the PC and
LogBook. A PC-Card carrying the setup file and/or data must be physically transported between the PC
and LogBook.
Note: The LBK1 remote operation terminal can be used with an unattached LogBook for limited control
and monitoring. The LBK1 option is detailed in chapter 5 of the LogBook User’s Manual.

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-3

LogView Features and Capabilities
In setting up an acquisition, LogView can:• Configure parameters for all input, output, and calculated channels without using special
programming skills.
• Provide flexible triggering to acquire continuous data, capture exceptions or, to trigger based on
calculated channels.
• Configure and operate expansion chassis, including the DBK option cards and modules designed forvarious signal-conditioning environments.
• Provide utilities (convert units, calibrate sensors, calculate channels, control outputs/alarms, etc).
In handling data, LogView can:
• Download an acquisition setup file to a PC-Card for physical transport to a remote LogBook, or send
the setup file directly to the PC-Card in a LogBook via the serial or parallel port.
• Upload the recorded data from LogBook by corresponding means.
• Create files for use by other Windows programs; e.g., database or analysis.
Utility-wise, LogView can:• Calibrate all gains and offsets on a per-channel basis.
• Launch a separate “view” program that allows you to graphically view pre-recorded data.
• Interact with LogBook while the acquisition is taking place including manual trigger and event
marking.
In monitoring an acquisition, LogView can:• Display readings and status in real-time. On-screen indicators provide channel feedback during an
acquisition. Channel values can be displayed in charts, bar graphs, analog meters, or digital readouts.
• Show system status including trigger status, errors, alarms, etc.

LV-4

LogView

989592

Software ReferenceSoftware User-Interface
LogView’s user-interface uses a control window with toolbar/menus and a spreadsheet model. Similar toother Windows-based programs, LogView’s user interface will seem familiar and intuitive. Windows canbe sized and placed to best fit your application. Several different meter styles are available to monitor data
in real time if so desired.
Control Window (Pull-Down Menus and Toolbars)
File

View

DeviceTools

Indicators

New

Hardware Configuration

Select PC Card

Convert Binary Data

Bar Graph Meters

Open
Save

Analog Input Channels
Digital Input Channels

Select LogBook
AttachMerge Binary Data
View Data

Analog Meters
Digital Meters

Save As

Output Channels

Break

Enable Input Reading
ColumnDownload
UploadGPS/Serial Input Channels
Calculated Channels

Arm Acquisition
Stop Acquisition

Start All Indicators
Stop All Indicators

Download As

Acquisition Configuration

LogBook Monitor

Configuration Report

Preferences

Explorer

About LogView
AuthorizationÆUse code: ED7B55484273 to authorize complete functionality.

Exit

LogView Pull-down Menu Selections
LogView pull-down menus, represented by the above table are discussed in the section, Menu Descriptions.
The following figure shows LogView’s control window. Note that two sets of toolbar buttons reside justbelow the menu row.

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-5

Toolbar commands can be accessed in two ways: (1) via toolbar, or (2) via pull-down menu selection. Note that thepull-down menus include additional commands that do not have associated toolbar buttons.

LogView Control Window – LogBook Unattached

LogView Control Window – LogBook Attached
Legend
1 – New Setup File

8 – Stop Acquisition

2 – Open Setup File

9 – Hardware Configuration

3 – Save Setup File

10 – Analog Input Setup

4 – Break PC from LogBook (Shows when PC is attached), or– Attach PC to LogBook (Shows when PC is unattached)

11 – Digital Input Setup

5 – DownLoad to LogBook (Shows when PC is attached), or– DownLoad to PC-Card (Shows when PC is unattached)
6 – UpLoad Acquisition Setup & Data to LogBook(Shows when PC is attached), or– UpLoad Acquisition Setup & Data to PC-Card(Shows when PC is unattached)

12 – Output I/O Setup
13 – GPS (Global Positioning System) / Serial IN Setup Option
14 – Calculated IN Channel Setup
15 – Acquisition Configuration
16 – View Data [via a post acquisition view application]

7 – Arm (Start) Acquisition

Spreadsheet Model
LogView’s interface uses a spreadsheet model of cells in rows and columns (see next figure):• Each row is a different channel. Individually-controlled channels can be hardware-based or
calculated; channels can be identified with user-specified labels.
• Each column is a parameter related to the channel. Some parameters can be user-set (user label,sample rate, etc.); others are read only (physical channel, readings from transducers, etc.).
Note:

LV-6

LogView

Generally, cells that are “grayed-out” rather than black are not subject to user input (e.g. physicalchannel, channel type); however, grayed-out Sample Rates under the Storage tab can be changedin the Acquisition Configuration Window.

989592

Software ReferenceAnalog Input Channel Configuration Window, Spreadsheet Portion
LogView’s spreadsheet-style setup provides a simple method of both viewing and configuring theparameters of the input, output, and calculated channels. Several spreadsheets are needed to display all thechannels’ parameters. LogView’s spreadsheet windows include:• Analog Input Channel Configuration (see page LV- 30 for details) - This default-opening window
has more parameter columns than will fit in view at one time. Therefore, the left-most (white)columns are shown in every view; these parameters include: Physical Channel, User Label, On/Off,
Reading, Range, Units, and Channel Type. The right-most (shaded) columns vary depending on
which folder tab is selected. Each tab (Storage, DBK Parameters, User Scaling, and 2-Point
Calibration) has
tab-specific parameters.
• Digital and Counter Input Channel Configuration (see page LV-34) - LogBook has three 8-bit
digital ports and one high-speed 16-bit port configurable as inputs or outputs. Digital expansion
cards can provide up to 192 digital bits. There are also 4 pulse-input ports that can count pulses forsumming and/or frequency measurement.
• Output-Channels Configuration (see page LV-35) - This window shows all the currently-available
digital and analog output channels. Each output channel is fed by a user-set source channel. Sourcechannels can be chosen from any of the input (hardware) channels or calculated (virtual) channels.
• Calculated-Channel Configuration (see page LV-36) - LogView can derive virtual channels using
standard math operators and functions (<, >, min, max., etc.). Virtual channels can be used to create
alarms, reduce data statistically, develop sophisticated trigger equations, and manipulate input
channel values for more useful output including simple control systems.
Help Box
The bottom of the spreadsheet contains a context sensitive Help Box for the selected field. As you
configure channel parameters, the Help box identifies the field and provides pertinent user information.
An example, taken from the previous figure, follows.
Example: In the above figure the User Label cell (of channel 1) is selected. The Help box identifies thefield as “User-specified channel label” and states user options. In this case, they are (1) to typein a desired label, i.e., to provide the channel with more meaningful name [not to exceed 16
characters]; or (2) keep the default label of P1_CH00.
User Input
To set up channel parameters, first select the appropriate cell (highlighted in a bold box) with the mouse or
keyboard arrow keys (up/down/sideways). Some cells allow you to key-in values from a keyboard (values
such as user labels, offsets, etc.). When key-in cells are selected, a user-input box will appear where you
can type in characters as needed (e.g., channel label in previous figure). Some cells allow you to choose
the desired setting from a drop-down list; you select among the options, and the parameter is set. Other
cells allow you to set numeric values with “spinner” up/down arrows that change the value incrementally(selecting a point between the spinners changes the mouse action into a virtual scroll bar—as you drag themouse vertically, the numeric values change accordingly).

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-7

User-set parameters can be set individually per channel, or the same value can be “filled down” for an
entire column. To apply the same column setting to multiple channels, use the spreadsheet’s fill-downfeature. Select multiple cells in a column by dragging the mouse with the left mouse button (or using theShift and arrow keys). Enable the fill-down feature with the right mouse button.
As a shortcut to toggle channel readings on or off, you can place the cursor in the Reading column anddouble-click the mouse. Another alternative is to double-click the column title, and every channel value inthe column will change to the next value if such a value is list-selectable. Globally, you can switch allchannel readings in the Indicators menu as Start All Indicators and Stop All Indicators.
For program windows that exhibit an <Apply> button, note that parameter changes will
not be locked-in until the <Apply> button has been pressed (clicked).

File Management
LogView uses various types of files for its operation:• System. logbook.sys is the file that actually operates LogBook. The file must reside on the PC-Card in
LogBook in order for the system to power-on and work properly. All PC-Cards used with LogBook need to havethe logbook.sys file.

• Setup (Acquisition Configuration). The filename extension for the acquisition setup file is .LVC (from
LogView Configuration). This file is downloaded to LogBook’s PC-Card. The file contains parameter details fora particular acquisition (as configured in LogView). When swapping PC-Cards in a remote LogBook, the new
PC-Card should have the same .LVC file.

• Data. Names for the data files use a long format convention as described below. The Preferences window fromthe View pull-down menu allows you to customize how your data files will be named.

File Organization
As data is uploaded to the PC, LogView first uploads the raw data file(s)and then converts them into the formats specified in the Preferences
window. The raw binary files are placed in the DATA directory in thepath specified during a configuration save. If the configuration wasnever saved the DATA directory will be created in the LogView
working directory.
LogView creates a sub-directory within DATA for each file format
selected. The figure to the right represents a typical file structure.

LV-8

LogView

989592

Software ReferenceData Filename Generation
Uploading can create one data file or many data files. A simple, completed data collection with one
timebase will produce only one data file. More complex conditions will create multiple data files. Whenthese conditions exist, LogView creates a file-set rather than a single file.
These configurations will create multiple data files during an upload.
• With multiple timebases enabled, LogView generates a separate file for each rate.
• With Auto Re-arm set greater than 0, multiple trigger blocks will be collected—each in a separate
file.
These events will generate multiple file-sets.
• When LogBook configuration is re-armed through LogView or by cycling LogBook’s power, a new
file-set is created.
• When a partial upload takes place with an attached LogBook, a new file-set is created.
• When a partial upload takes place from a PC-Card in the PC’s socket, a new file-set is created.
A partial upload saves part of the data from an active acquisition. Three ways to perform a partial upload:a) During an acquisition, connect your PC to LogBook and execute an upload. To make room for
additional data, the uploaded data is deleted from the PC-Card.
b) During an acquisition, swap the PC-Card in LogBook with a different card. Then insert the card into
your PC, and perform an upload.
c) Start an upload of any kind; then click Cancel while the upload is taking place.
Naming Format for Data Files
LogView names uploaded data files to make them easy to identify and organize. The File Converter
Preferences window (Represented below) allows you to customize LogView’s naming process to suit yourneeds. Navigate as follows to access the window: View Pull-down menu ⇒ Preferences ⇒ File Converter.
Preferences can be set so:• Files will not be accidentally overwritten• The use of several LogBooks is easy to manage.
• Test times and dates automatically embedded• It is easy to identify files that are part of the same acquisition
The figure and table below define the full-field format for data files. As described in the next section, you
may wish to turn off unneeded fields for simplicity.

seed#zzzzzz
Ddd-mm-yy

Thh-mm-ss

Rx
Bx-y

.ext

Software Reference

User-supplied identifier string (e.g., TOM1) provides easy identification of files associated witha specific test, person, or device-under-test.
When multiple LogBooks are being used, the 6-digit serial number identifies which LogBook was used
to collect the data.
The Date field represents the date the acquisition was initially armed. This date is not necessarily thedate when the data was actually collected. It is possible LogBook was armed on Thursday but did not
trigger until Saturday. The file-last-modified date shown as a file attribute in Windows Explorer (notLogView Explorer) is the date the file was uploaded to the PC.
The Time field represents the time the acquisition was initially armed. This time is not necessarily thetime when the data was actually collected. It is possible LogBook was armed at noon but did not
trigger until 2:00pm. The file-last-modified time shown as a file attribute in Windows Explorer(not LogView Explorer) is the date the file was uploaded to the PC.
The Rate field holds a number from 1 to 4 representing the scan rate for the file. If channels are stored
at more than one rate, a file is created for each rate.
The Block field holds 2 numbers: x is the trigger block number, and y is the segment of the trigger block.
A trigger block is segmented when partial uploads take place. Typically, y will be 1 when the entire
trigger block is uploaded at once. The numbers are generated chronologically as they occur.
The filename extension for the data files and their explanatory header files (see following figure)989592

LogView

LV-9

File Converter Preferences Window
This window is reached by navigating as follows: View Pull-down menu ⇒ Preferences ⇒ File Converter

Customizing the File Name

LogView Preferences Window, Upload Tab Selected
This window is reached by navigating as follows:
View Pull-down menu ⇒ Preferences ⇒ Upload Tab
Under certain conditions, all filename fields may not be needed. To turn off fields, simply enable ordisable the check boxes in the Upload tab of the Preferences window (see figure here and discussion
on page LV- 45). Be aware that simplifying the filename removes the safeguards to prevent 2 files
having the same name and causing an overwrite/lost information condition. If fields are disabled,
overwrites are more likely to occur.
The following table suggests when it is safe to turn off various filename fields.
Condition
I want to overwrite old data every time I perform an upload.
I only have one LogBook.
I use a new seed every time I upload.
I often accumulate multiple acquisitions on the PC-Card andwant to upload them at one time.
I never perform partial uploads.

LV-10

LogView

989592

Recommendation
No optional fields are required.
Turn off LogBook serial number field.
Only the seed option is needed.
Make sure at least the time field is enabled; otherwise,
acquisitions will be overwritten as they are uploaded.
Don’t need block number.

Software ReferenceExample of all parameters: LAB1 #123456 D03-15-98 T12-04-12 R1 B1-1
SEED (user description string) = “LAB1”
LogBook serial number = 123456
Date armed = March 15, 1998
Time armed = 12:04:12PM
Rate = 1
Trigger block = 1, Segment = 1

Simplest application. If a new acquisition is uploaded, this file will be overwritten: R1 B1-1
Rate = 1
Trigger block = 1, Segment = 1

If all acquisitions are performed in the same day, the time can identify the files: T12-04-12 R1 B1-1
Time = 12:04:12pm
Rate = 1
Trigger block = 1, Segment = 1

The example below shows data files from an acquisition with 2 trigger blocks and 2 timebases; theacquisition was uploaded in segments. All the dates and times are the same because these trigger blocks
are all part of the same acquisition. The first two files represent a continuous data collection—2 files exist
because of partial uploads.

Example of Data Uploaded in Segments

Procedures
Because of LogView’s flexibility, this manual can not detail every possible use of the system. Instead,these procedures explain how to perform typical tasks. Understanding these tasks will help you apply theprinciples to a variety of data acquisition environments. For your particular application, you may needto combine or alter these procedures. For more details, you may need to refer to related Menu Descriptions
or procedures.
This section begins with a flowchart of a simple acquisition and then explains the following tasks andoperational modes:
Using an Attached LogBook……page LV- 12
Using LogBook “Unattached”……page LV- 14
Simple Data Logging……page LV- 14
Setting Up DBK Cards……page LV- 16
Using Multiple Timebases……page LV- 17
Using Digital 2-Point Calibration……page LV- 18
Using Digital Outputs As Alarms…page LV- 21
Using Exception Capturing……page LV- 23

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-11

Flowchart of a Simple Acquisition
Consider the flowchart of a simple data acquisition. Whether LogBook is attached or unattached, theprocess is similar except for downloading and uploading. You begin the process in LogView by defining
the parameters for an acquisition.

Using an Attached LogBook
When using an attached LogBook, LogView communicates directly to the PC-Card in LogBook throughthe communication interface (serial or parallel).

After LogView recognizes the attached LogBook, an acquisition setup file can be downloaded to LogBook.
After the acquisition, data can be uploaded from LogBook without handling the PC-Card.
Note that steps 1 through 4 are often done during the initial installation.
LV-12

LogView

989592

Software Reference

1.
2.

3.
4.

5.
6.

On your PC with LogView already loaded, open control panel applet, and check Hardware
Configuration. If no LogBook is present in the tree, click Add Device and a LogBook ID; otherwise,
select a LogBook in the tree and click Properties.
Under LogBook Properties tab, enter orverify device name, the connection type,the protocol, a timeout duration; andthen click Apply.
(if serial connection) Under Port
Settings tab, select baud rate and relatedparameters; and then click Apply.
Verify proper LogBook connection andpower-on; then, under the Test
Hardware tab after, click the <Test>
button. Testing will verify systemparameters and then bench-mark systemcommunication performance.
Launch LogView from your PC (unless you set up a shortcut, you can find LogView in the Programsgroup in the Start menu). The control window and the Analog Input Channel Configuration window
should appear.
Under the Device menu in the control window, click Select LogBook. From the drop down list,
select LogBook you just configured in the hardware tree; then click the Attach icon to establish
a communications link. The <Upload> and <DownLoad> buttons in the Control Window should
now be enabled (LogView recognizes when LogBook is attached and enables the applicable tools as
seen by their lettering turning from gray to black).

7.

In LogView’s Analog Input Channel Configuration (page LV- 30) and Acquisition Configuration(page LV- 42) windows, set up the channels and trigger parameters you wish to use (see Simple Data
Logging, page LV- 14).
8. Download the acquisition setup file just configured to LogBook
9. Click the Arm Acquisition button (f). LogBook is now armed and ready to collect data when thetrigger parameter is satisfied.
10. During the acquisition, you can monitor system status via LogBook Monitor window accessed fromthe Device pull-down menu. To verify proper operation, such monitoring is recommended for the
first run of a new acquisition setup file.
11. After collecting data, click the <Upload> button to pull the data into the PC (see page LV- 25).
Depending on the communication channel and size of data files, uploads take a variable amount oftime. Uploads can also be done incrementally during an acquisition.
The next time you launch LogView, it will automatically look for the selected LogBook and attempt to
attach itself. At this point, LogView and LogBook will be in constant communication. If you want to turnoff LogBook’s power or detach the communication cable, you should first select Break from the Device
menu or Exit from the File menu.
PC-Cards purchased with LogBook have been initialized at the factory. PC-Cards
purchased elsewhere must be initialized through LogView. The initialization procedure isdiscussed in the following paragraph.
Initializing a PC-Card
PC-Cards, that were purchased with LogBook, have been initialized. PC-Cards purchased elsewheremust be initialized. Initialization is accomplished as follows:
1.

Place the PC-Card in the PC’s corresponding socket.

2.

Select the driver according to your card’s documentation.

3.

In LogView, under the Device menu, click Select PC-Card, then click OK.

LogView will check the card and initialize it as needed.

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-13

Using LogBook “Unattached”
When using a LogBook “unattached,” LogView
does not communicate in real time with
LogBook; instead, LogView downloads theacquisition setup file to a local PC-Card that canlater be manually transferred to LogBook.
After the acquisition is complete, the PC-Card
that collected data in LogBook must be
manually transferred to the PC where LogView can then upload the data. The PC-Card must first be
properly initialized :
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Take any ATA PC-Card memory device, and insert it into a corresponding socket on the PC. If thisis the 1st time this type of card has been inserted, Windows may require driver information. Follow
the on-screen instructions, or refer to the documentation included with the PC-Card.
Launch LogView from your PC (unless you set up a shortcut, you can find LogView in the Programsgroup in the Start menu). The control window and the Analog Input Channel Configuration window
should appear.
Under the Device menu, click Select PC-Card. Use the drop down list to tell LogView which drive
letter is associated with the PC-Card. Note: as PC-Cards are inserted
and removed from the sockets, Windows will arbitrarily assign drive
letters. If 2 PC-Cards occupy 2 sockets, the order of their insertion
usually dictates the assignment of drive letters. The <Attach>,<Upload>, and <Download> buttons on the Control Window should now be enabled.
In LogView’s Analog Input Channel Configuration and Acquisition Configuration windows, set up
the channels and trigger parameters you wish to use (see Simple Data Logging below).
Download the acquisition setup file (logbook.sys will also be downloaded if not already present).
Eject (remove) the PC-Card from the PC socket, and transport it to the remote LogBook site. Insert
the PC-Card into LogBook's socket, and power up LogBook. LogBook will automatically load the
setup file and arm the system.
After the remote LogBook has collected all the data, remove the PC-Card from LogBook's socket,
transport it to the PC, and insert it into the PC's socket. If LogView is running, it will soon recognize
the presence of the card and enable the <Upload> and <Download> buttons.
Click Upload to pull the data into the PC.

After telling LogView which drive letters are associated with PC-Card disks, LogView will periodically poll
the system for their presence. As cards are inserted and ejected, LogView will automatically enable anddisable the <Upload> and <Download> buttons.
If a large quantity of data will be recorded, you should return to the remote LogBookin time to swap PC-Cards [before the first card is full]. Card swapping is discussed in
the introduction chapter of the user’s manual. All PC-Cards to be swapped must first be
initialized as discussed in the previous section.

Simple Data Logging
To log data, you need to configure the hardware, set up the channels, and configure the acquisition
parameters. The following steps are generic and will vary with different applications.
1. Launch LogView, and Attach LogView to your Logbook if working in an attached modeor to a PC-Card inserted in your PC if working in a remote, unattached mode(see previous 2 procedures if necessary).
2. Select New under the File menu or the new file button (see figure at right), and give theacquisition setup file a name relevant to your application.
3. Click the Analog <Input> button to display the setup grid in the Analog Input Channel
Configuration window. Turn all but the 1st 4 channels off (or as applicable) by placing
the cursor in the On/Off column and double-clicking to toggle the setting on and off(unused channels that are left ON will limit the maximum scan rate possible). To change
the Range for a particular channel, click the cursor on the affected and then use the drop
down user input box to select an appropriate range (can be bipolar or unipolar).

LV-14

LogView

989592

Software Reference

4.
5.
6.

Selecting Input Range for Channel P1-CH02
Click the Digital <Input> button. Turn all the digital channels “Off”—or “On” as applicable.
Click the <Acq> (Acquisition Configuration) button or select that submenu fromthe View pull-down menu, and the Acquisition Configuration window will appear.
From the Acquisition Configuration window, select all the parameters that define
your desired acquisition. Under the Trigger tab, select Immediate as the trigger if
you want to start the acquisition the moment the system is armed. Under the Post Trigger tab, selecta durationof 1 minute. In the Scan Rate frame, set Base Rate A to 5 Hz (or as applicable) by typing in a value
and selecting the proper unit.

Acquisition Configuration Window
7.

After verifying that all settings are as you desire, select Save under the File menu and associate
a name to your acquisition setup file (if not already done so).
8. From the main toolbar, click the <Download> button to send the setup file to
LogBook’s PC-Card.
9. To arm an attached LogBook, click the Arm (f) button.
or
10. To arm a remote LogBook, eject the PC-Card, transport it to LogBook, insert
it into LogBook's socket, and then apply power.
11. To upload data from an attached LogBook during or after an acquisition, click the<Upload> button.
12. To upload data from a remote LogBook after the acquisition is complete, or as part of card or
swapping, eject the PC-Card from LogBook and transport to the PC’s socket; then clickthe <Upload> button.
13. To inspect the data, click the <View Data> button. This will activate a “view” program, if
installed.

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-15

Setting Up DBK Cards
DBK cards and modules provide channel expansion and signal conditioning. For proper operation, youmust use LogView for software configuration of the DBK cards. All hardware configuration-relatedparameters can be found in the LogBook Hardware Configuration Window (sometimes referred to as a
“hardware tree”).
Reference Note: The DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual PDF (p/n 457-0905)
contains parameter definitions and information as to which parameters are set in hardware andwhich are set in software.
1.
2.
3.

Open the LogBook Hardware Configuration Window by clicking the <H/W> (Hardware
Configuration) button.
To add analog input DBKs, select P1 Analog I/O in the tree, and set its property to Single-ended.
Digital DBKs use P2 port and are set up in a similar way.
Select a channel and assign it either a local channel or a specific DBK expansion module that will
multiplex several channels into the same main channel. See following figure.

Setting Analog I/O Channel P1_CH00, DBK52 T/C Card Selected
4.

Most DBKs have related cards and sub-channels as part of their method to multiplex up to
16 channels into each main channel. Click the appropriate checkboxes to set up the channels; andthen OK to accept these settings. See following figure.

Selecting Applicable DBK4 Dynamic Signal Cards
5.

Click the Analog <Input> button to view the newly setup channels in the Analog Input Channel
Configuration spreadsheet (see page LV- 30). Verify all channel numbers and assign user labels as
desired.
Note: In some cases, such as with DBK19, channel values are returned in units of temperature,
instead of volts.

6.

From the Analog Input Channel Configuration window, select the DBK Parameters tab to view
specific settings for each DBK channel. Set the DBK parameters at this time. If necessary, refer tothe appropriate section of the DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual for an explanation of
the parameters; for example, DBK4 programmable filter values and DBK7 debouncing times.
You can resize the Analog Input Channel Configuration window by dragging its right edge
further to the right. This allows you to see up to four parameters for each channel.

LV-16

LogView

989592

Software ReferenceSetting DBK Parameters in the Analog Input Channel Configuration Window
When configuring DBKs, the LogBook Hardware Configuration Window provides a means of setting up
all manual hardware settings. Once configured, the analog and digital channel setup spreadsheets provide
a means of setting up channel-specific, programmable features.
Some DBKs have hardware settings that must be manually set inside the DBK, such as
jumpers or DIP switches. In these cases the parameter setting in LogView must matchthe actual hardware. Setting one does not automatically set the other; in other words,
you must make configuration settings in both software and hardware, when applicable.
For specific DBK hardware configuration refer to the appropriate section of the
DBK Option Cards & Modules User’s Manuals (p/n 457-0905).

Using Multiple Timebases
LogBook is capable of storing channels at 4 independent timebases (one base rate and 3 rates that are
divisions of the base rate). Two reasons for using multiple timebases are: first, to reduce the amount ofstorage required by saving slow channels at a slow rate—acquisition can last longer before filling up the
PC-Card; and second, to provide noise reduction by averaging and thus enhance the value of the data.
1.

Open the Acquisition Configuration window (see page LV- 42) by clicking the<Acq> (Acquisition Configuration) button.

2.

In the scan rate frame at the right of the window, set the Base Rate A to the
maximum frequency required for any channel.

Acquisition Configuration Window
3.

Check all three rate checkboxes B, C, D. Type in a divider for rates B through D to create sub-rate
sampling frequencies which are based on Base Rate A. LogView will compute and display thecorresponding rates in frequency or period units.
Note: The higher the divider (right most column) the slower the scan rate.

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-17

4.

5.
6.

To reduce noise in sensitive channels like thermocouples, these channels can be sampled at a highrate but stored at a slower rate after mathematically averaging the intermediate values. By checking
the Apply Noise Reduction Averaging checkbox, channels stored at a sub-rate will store the averageof all of the values collected at the Base Rate A. Extraneous values that are obvious errors will haveless effect on the data—it’s also possible to set up a calculated channel that only accepts values
within a defined range.
Close the Acquisition Configuration Window.
Click the Analog <Input> button to display the Analog Input Channel Configuration window. Under
the Storage tab, note that the newly configured sample rates are enabled. The sample rate columns
determine the rate at which each channel’s data will be stored. Each enabled (On) channel can havedata stored at sample rates A, B, C, D (or a combination, there of), see following figure.

Setting Sample Rates for Data Storage. Each enabled channel can be assigned up to four rates.
7.
8.

Set the cells in these four columns to Yes or No, as desired, for all enabled (On) channels.
Channels shown as “Off” are not sampled.
Once configured, download the acquisition setup file, and initiate data collection.

Using Digital 2-Point Calibration
Remote LogBooks can not be calibrated. 2-point calibration can only be performed
when LogBook is attached to the PC via a communication interface.
2-point calibration allows you to mathematically “trim out” inaccuracies in the measurement equipment
and/or the transducer. By allowing the equipment to measure 2 known points in the measurement range,
LogBook can calculate linear constants (the scale and offset) to correct inaccuracies in its analog inputs(see page LV- 32). For channels where only one known point can be applied and verified, LogView
provides offset trimming.

LV-18

LogView

1.

Click the <Attach> button to establish communication with LogBook.

2.

Click the Analog <Input> button to open the analog input spreadsheet.

3.

Click the 2-Point Calibration tab to expose the calibration columns. If some columns are obscured,
scroll to the right to reveal them or resize the window by dragging the right edge further to the right.
Note that the default Cal Scale and Cal Offset [mathematically applied to each channel] are 1 and 0,
respectively (right-most columns).

989592

Software ReferenceAnalog Input Channel Configuration, 2-Point Cal Tab Selected

2-Point Cal Tab, Partial Close-up
4.

Apply a voltage to channel 1 near the bottom end of the measurement range.

5.

Type the known value into the Set P1 column for the associated channel.

6.

Click the <Execute> button under the Get P1 heading. This allows you to read the channel andcalculate the required offset. Note that the channel value read is now shown in the Actual P1
column and the Cal Offset column now shows the correction factor.

7.

Apply a voltage to channel 1 near the top of the measurement range.

8.

Type the known value into the Set P2 column for the associated channel.

9.

Click the <Execute> button under the Get P2 heading to read the channel and calculate the required
offset and scale. Note that the channel value is now shown in the Actual P2 column. The
Cal Offset and Cal Scale columns now show the correction factors.
For channels using thermocouples, it may be impractical to provide more than one
calibration point. In such cases, apply just one known point in Set P1, and click thecorresponding <Execute> button. This will adjust the offset only, which is typically thesource of most transducer error.
For strain gages, use the User Scaling tab to enter the transducers' transfer functions (e.g.,
volts to pounds), then use 2-point calibration to periodically trim the scale and offset. Thiseliminates the need to manually adjust sensors using hardware potentiometers.

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-19

User Scaling. Final Reading = Scale*RawReading + Offset

An Example of Using LogView for 2-Point Calibration
Once the trimpots have been physically adjusted during initial installation, periodic trimming can be
performed through LogView’s 2-Point software calibration. The LogView procedure does not require theuse of trimpots and should not be confused with the 2-point method in which trimpots are mechanicallycalibrated as discussed in the DBK16 section of the DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual.
During the LogView software procedure, 1 or 2 loads are read and compared with expected values. The
software automatically calculates and applies the necessary correction factors.

The above figure shows the columns in the 2-Point Calibration tab. To fine tune the accuracy of thevalue coming from a linear sensor, LogView provides both 1- and 2-point calibration.
•

One-point calibration can be used to zero a channel, such as a thermocouple channel, which isusually more accurate in scale than offset. One example of one-point calibration is that of placing athermocouple in an ice bath and setting the 0°C point, and no other.

•

2-point calibration determines the scale and offset factors to convert the raw readings into accurate
calibrated readings. Two points of known (set) values must be compared with two actual sensor
readings.

An example of 2-Point Calibration (via LogView Software).
To calibrate a strain-gage scale:
1. Unload the scale.
2. Enter a value of 0.0 into the Set P1 column.
3. Click the Get P1 <Execute> button. This lets you read the actual sensor value (2.0 in theexample).
4. Place a 100 lb. weight on the scale.
5. Enter a value of 100 into the Set P2 column.
6.

LV-20

LogView

Click the Get P2 <Execute> button. This lets you read the actual sensor value (95.0 in
the example).

989592

Software ReferenceLogView automatically computes the Cal Offset factor (near 0) and Cal Scale factor (near 1).
From this point on, LogView automatically applies the y = mx + b equation to the incoming reading,resulting in a calibrated reading.

Using Digital Outputs As Alarms
Using LogView's calculated channel capability (see page LV- 36), digital outputs can be stimulated byevents such as signal levels in analog inputs (e.g., to sound an alarm at a rising temperature before a test
system over heats).
1.

Click the Analog <Input> button to activate the Analog Input Channel Configuration
window.

2.

Turn on the analog input channel that you'd like to use to stimulate a digital output
channel.

3.

Click the <Calc> (Calculated Channel) button to open the Calculated Channel
Configuration window.

4.

Click the <Add New Channel> button (located just right of the F(x) button); or select“Add New Channel” from the Edit pull-down menu to activate the first or next calculated channel.

5.

In the Calculated Function column, type in the following equation "(P1_CH00 > 30.0) & 1". If
you're not using channel 0, replace P1_CH00 with your channel tag. This equation will yield a 1 inits least significant bit when the value of channel 0 is above 30, and 0 when it is below 30.

Entering an Equation (Function Expression)
To verify accurate use of syntax, access the Equation Assistant (see following figure) via
the F(x) button and click the <Validate> button. Refer to page LV-37 for detailed
information regarding the Equation Assistant.

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-21

The Equation Assistant can be used to create and validate equations.
6.
7.
8.

In the Calculated Channel setup grid, set the newly configured channel to “On.”Close the Calculated Channel grid.
Click the <Output> I/O Setup button. If no digital output rows are present, click the<H/W> (Hardware Configuration) button in the main toolbar and add a few digital I/O
ports as outputs; e.g., the LBK2 DAC on the P3 port.

Selecting a Control Source
9.

Select an output port; then set its Source to the calculated channel that we just configured. Unless
you changed the label in the Calculated Channel grid, the source will be CALC_00.
10. Once configured, download the configuration to initiate data collection with the specified alarm
output.

LV-22

LogView

989592

Software ReferenceUsing Exception Capturing
LogView can be set up to wait for defined events to occur, then capture data until another specified event.
The triggering process is controlled through the Acquisition Configuration window (see page LV- 42). If
Auto Re-arm is used, LogBook will then re-arm itself after each triggering sequence, waiting for theoccurrence of the next trigger event. This setup allows LogBook to capture specific events
rather thana continuous data stream that may be useless in some applications. Exception capturing is useful
where continuous data would soon fill up the PC-Card with low-value data.
1. Click the <Acq> (Acquisition Configuration) button to open the Acquisition Configuration window.
2. Set up the trigger parameter as required. The trigger can be set to various parameters including thelevel of an analog input channel where you can select a threshold and hysteresis with rising or fallingedge. Trigger sources include analog input level, digital channel, immediate, absolute time, andmanual Event Mark.
When in the Manual mode, to enable the <Event Mark> buttons on the LogBook
Monitor window and on LBK1 you must select the Enable Event Mart checkbox in the
Acquisition Configuration window. See the following figure.

Setting Up the Trigger Parameter
3.
4.

5.
6.
7.
8.

In the Pre-trigger tab, set up a duration of time occurring before the trigger event that you would liketo save data for. Exception capturing is most effective when you can set trigger parameters to isolate
the particular data of interest (e.g., all data 2 minutes before and after a specific event).
In the Post-trigger tab, you can set the stop event based on a duration, an analog or digital event, ora manual Event Mark.

Enable auto Re-arm by setting the field to 10.
Set up input channels as needed in the Analog Input Channel Configuration window.
Save the setup file, download it to the PC-Card, and start the acquisition.
After the data has been acquired, upload the data files from the PC-Card with LogView’s Explorer or<Upload> button. Note that individual trigger blocks for each capture have indexed file names, witheach name being unique.
Reference Note: The File Management section of this document, which begins on pageLV- 8, contains detailed information regarding filename structure.

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-23

Menu Descriptions
The rest of the document module describes each menu in detail, including all the related windows andparameters. The menus are presented in the order they appear in the control window and can be referred toas needed.

File Menu
New
Open
Save
Save As
Download
UploadDownload As
Configuration
ReportAbout LogView
Authorization
Exit

The File menu helps manage your data and configuration files. You can determine the file format, as
well as how and where the files are saved in memory. As stated in the previous reference note, The
File Management section of this document module, beginning on page LV- 8, contains detailed
information regarding filename structure.

New

The New command allows you to create a new file. If you try to leave a configuration not yet saved,
dialog box asks how “Do you want to save the current configuration?”; select Yes, No, or Cancel.
The Save/Save As window will appear. Several icons in the top right of the window offer you help innavigating through files and levels of folders.

The Open command allows you open a previously created configuration file.

Open

LV-24

Æ Use code: ED7B55484273 to authorize complete functionality.

LogView

989592

Software Reference

Save

The Save command allows you to store the configuration file you are currently working on.
The Save As command uses the same window as the Save command and allows you to enter a new
file name. The current file remains unchanged from its last save.

Save As(no toolbar
icon)

UploadThe Upload command uses LogView’s Explorer to get data files from a PC-Card. The PC-Card canreside in LogBook if LogBook is attached to the PC or in the PC’s card slot if the PC-Card was
manually transferred from a remote LogBook.
Note:

or

The Upload icon and the Explorer item in the Device menu can upload from both LogBookor the PC’s card slot; in either case, the icon looks slightly different as shown at left.

When the <Upload> button is clicked:• If only 1 acquisition file (inactive) resides on the PC-Card, all that data is uploaded to the PC’s
hard drive.
• If more than 1 acquisition file resides on the PC-Card, an exploring window will appear andallow you to select which acquisition files or trigger blocks you may wish to upload.
• (attached mode only) If the only acquisition file on the PC-Card is active, all acquired data will
be uploaded. To prevent duplication of records and conserve storage space, data alreadyuploaded is then deleted from the PC-Card.

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-25

The buttons at the bottom of the window (see following figure) allow you to:• Upload All the files on the PC-Card to your PC’s hard drive with the designated Path and delete dataon the PC-Card if “Delete on Upload All” is selected in LogView Preferences. Note: with attachedmode and an active acquisition, this is the only way to upload data.
• Upload Selected uploads only those files which you select.
• Delete All the files on the PC-Card.
• Refresh will refresh Explorer with data from an active acquisition.
• Cancel will close the dialog box.

If uploading an active file for the first time (using Upload All), the following window appears(here, Cancel will stop an upload in progress):

If uploading an active file that is already partially uploaded, the following window will appear:

LV-26

LogView

989592

Software Reference

The Download command downloads the current LogView setup to LogBook if attached (or a PC-Card
if LogBook is unattached) with the same name as the LogView setup name. If the current setup isdefault-named “Untitled”, a dialog box asks “Enter the acquisition name before LogView will
download current configuration.” Select OK to save, Cancel to stop download process.

Downloador

The Download As… command works much likea Save As command and brings up the window
shown at left. You can choose your own file
name. When fields contain the correct data,
select the <Download> button; or you may
Cancel the operation.

Download
As…
(no toolbar
icon)

The checkbox Start acquisition on “Power On” isdefault-checked so that a remote LogBook will
begin an acquisition as soon as it is turned on.
You can uncheck this box if you will be using an
LBK1 to arm the acquisition or if you will beapplying power to LogBook but not wanting tobegin an acquisition immediately.

Configuration Report
Configuration Report allows you to save a report of the configuration parameters. An example follows.

Configuration Report Window (selected from File Pull-down Menu)

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-27

Sample Configuration Report (Condensed Image)

About LogView
Authorization

Provides the software version number and a statement regarding copyright violations.
The File Pull-Down menu includes an
Authorization dialog box. If you want to use one of
the following features: Modem Support, Upload
Scheduler, or GPS Support, you must enter anappropriate authorization code.
We have included the following code to unlock allfeatures:

ED7B55484273
Authorization Dialog Box

The Exit command closes LogView. LogView can also be closed by selecting the “X” button
at the top right of the Control Window. If entered data has not been downloaded (saved), a
dialog box will appear with such a message.

Exit

LV-28

LogView

989592

Software ReferenceView Menu
Hardware Configuration
Analog Input Channels
Digital Input Channels
Output Channels
GPS/Serial Input Channels
Calculated Channels
Acquisition Configuration
Preferences

HardwareConfiguration

The View menu includes configuration windows, most of them in the spreadsheet format.
Descriptions of the View pull-down menu’s selections follow.

Selecting Hardware Configuration brings up the windows shown below. As you progress
through the hardware tree, the window will prompt you for related information as needed. All 3
I/O ports (P1, P2, P3) are set up here.
Note: these windows only set up non-programmable parameters to match corresponding hardware
settings. LogView cannot know these settings unless you enter them here. Some DBKs haveprogrammable settings that must be set under the DBK Parameters tab of the Analog Input
Channel Configuration window.

This figure shows user
selecting the differential
mode of analog input on
P1.

This figure shows user
selecting a particular DBK
to be attached to channel
15 of P1.

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-29

This figure shows user
selecting a particular DBK
as assigned to 1 of 4banks of channels on P2.

This figure shows user
selecting LogBook’s timer
on P3’s Digital I/O line.

Analog Input Channel Configuration
The analog input spreadsheet (see following figure) uses four tabs to group analog input parameters.
Always visible are the Physical Channel, User Label, On/Off, real-time Reading, Range, Units, andChannel Type columns. Clicking a tab exposes one of the four sub-windows of parameters including
Storage, DBK Parameters, User Scaling, or 2-Point Calibration.
If beneficial, adjust column width by placing the cursor on the line between columns (in thecolumn header) and drag the line left or right as needed, for example, to enter a more
descriptive user label.

LV-30

LogView

989592

Software ReferenceIn the User Label column, use the default channel labels or insert your own labels of up to 16 characters(the column width is flexible). Labels are saved with the data so more meaningful channel names willappear in your post acquisition display-and-analysis software. For example, a calculated channel that
controls an alarm can be so named; several channels that are combined for a calculated channel can be so
named, etc.
When possible, use User Label names that closely resemble the Physical Channel names.
This practice makes channel identification easier to remember and helps avoid confusion.
Example: If Physical Channel P1_CH01 was being used for an alarm, a User Label of
P101Alarm would be logical.
In the On/Off column, use On to enable or Off to disable channels. System performance for the enabledchannels is improved by disabling (not sampling) the channels not in use.
The Reading column displays the real-time channel value in the user’s units. The immediate feedback bythis column allows you to optimize range settings, verify scaling, or validate sensor calibration.
For the Range column, all LogBook channels and most DBK cards have a programmable gain amplifier(PGA) that provides multiple ranges. Adjusting the range allows you to zoom in or out on your signal for
maximum signal resolution for the range needed. If the Units and/or Scale (from the User Scaling tab) arechanged, the available ranges are presented in terms of the new units. For example, if a user scaling of ×20
is applied to a channel to convert volts to PSI (pounds per square inch), the available range choices for that
LogBook channel would be ±200 PSI, ±100 PSI, ±50 PSI, 0-400 PSI, 0-200 PSI, etc.

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-31

The next figure shows the columns accessible with the Storage tab selected (default). If channels are
sampled only to derive calculated channels or stimulate outputs, they do not need to be stored. For
example, a channel can be sampled at a high rate to prevent aliasing while a calculated channel is used toderive and save its maximum every 10 seconds. In this case, only one sample every 10 seconds is saved,
rather than thousands. The Sample Rates columns in read-only mode are set up in the Acquisition
Configuration dialog box where up to 4 timebases can be defined. For applications with slow and fast
signals, slow signals can be sampled at a slower rate, optimizing the system’s storage capacity. The baserate A can be divided by 3 divisors for rates B, C, and D (see page LV- 43).

Analog Input Channel Configuration, Storage Tab Selected

Analog Input Channel Configuration, DBK Parameters Tab Selected
The above figure shows the DBK Parameters tab used to configure channels with programmable DBK
parameters. Depending on the DBK, values must be entered in the Param.1 to Param.4 columns. One
such example is the DBK4 that requires filter settings; some other DBK cards also have programmableparameters.
Some DBKs have hardware switches and jumpers for configuration. When using such
DBKs, corresponding parameters must be set in the
LogBook Hardware Configuration window.

Analog Input Channel Configuration, User Scaling Tab Selected
The User Scaling tab shown above has Scale and Offset columns. In User Scaling, you create a transfer
function so LogView will display units that are useful for your application. Here, you can arbitrarily
define your Units (apples, oranges, whatever) based on the raw input value, typically Volts. To do so, typeyour new unit name in the Units column and select an appropriate range (e.g. unipolar). Then, enter its
linear scale relation to the Volt (e.g. 25 pounds per Volt) and any offset from 0 (e.g. the empty basket
measures 0.1 V). The reading and range columns change accordingly.

LV-32

LogView

989592

Software ReferenceAnalog Input Channel Configuration, 2-Point Cal Tab Selected
Calibration. The above figure shows the columns in the 2-Point Calibration tab. To fine tune theaccuracy of the value coming from a linear sensor, LogView provides both 1- and 2-point calibration.
One-point calibration can be used to zero a channel—as in a thermocouple, which is usually moreaccurate in scale than offset. You might place the thermocouple in an ice bath and set just the 0°C point.
2-point calibration determines the scale and offset factors to convert the raw readings into accurate
calibrated readings. 2 points, of known (set) value, must be compared with 2 sensor (actual) readings.
For example, to calibrate a strain-gage scale, unload the scale, type 0.0 into the Set P1 column, then click
the Get P1 <Execute> button to read the actual sensor value (2.0). Place a known 100 lb weight on thescale; type 100 into the Set P2 column; then click the Get P2 <Execute> button to read the actual sensor
value (95.0). LogView automatically computes the Cal Offset factor (near 0) and Cal Scale factor (near1). From now on, LogView automatically applies the y = mx + b calculation to the incoming reading to
produce the calibrated reading.

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-33

Digital and Counter Input Channel Configuration
The basic LogBook system has three 8-bit digital ports and one high-speed 16-bit port configurable
as inputs or outputs in the LogBook Hardware Configuration window (see following figure). Whenconfigured as inputs, these ports appear in the Digital and Counter Input Channel Configuration
spreadsheet. Also, four pulse-input ports can count pulses for summing and/or frequency
measurement. Adding digital expansion cards provides up to 192 digital bits.

Configuring Digital I/O Port A as Input, and with Control Resolution as Individual Bits

Digital & Counter Input Channel Configuration Screen, Channels Configured forIndividual Bits

LV-34

LogView

989592

Software ReferenceDigital & Counter Input Channel Configuration, Each Channel as a Port of Bits
The Physical Channel column identifies the actual hardware port of the physical channel.
In the User Label column, you can use the default channel names or type in a more suitable label up to
32 characters in length. These labels are saved with the collected data.
The On column can enable (On) or disable (Off) individual channels. To maximize system performance,
only channels that are enabled are sampled.
The Reading column displays the read-time value of the digital port in the format specified in the Format
column.
Analog, digital, and pulse samples are all sampled together in LogBook. This makes time correlation
possible. In the Acquisition Configuration dialog box, up to four timebases can be specified. A digital orpulse channel can be sampled at any or all of these timebases.
Channels sampled only to derive calculated channels, or to simulate outputs do not need to
be stored.

Output Channels Configuration
The Output spreadsheet shows all of the currently available digital and analog output channels. Eachoutput channel requires a source channel to feed it. Source channels can be chosen from an analog
input for an analog output for from a digital input for a digital output.

Output Channel Configuration Window

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-35

The (physical) Channel column identifies the hardware channel assignment.
The User Label column allows you to enter a more suitable channel name of up to 32 characters.
The Source column designates the input or calculated channel used as the source of data for this output
channel. An entry of None disables the output channels.
The Initial Value column allows you to initialize the output to a specified value.
The Units column indicates units for Initial Value. This column can not be edited. The default is Decimal.

Serial / GPS Channels (LogBook/360 Only)
LogBook/360 can store latitude, longitude, and altitude coordinates along with the analog and digital datafrom the attached transducers, providing it is connected to a Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver.
LogView software provides an easy method for setting up the GPS channels. No programming, character
string parsing, or protocol decoding is necessary.
LogBook/360 can provide direct support for any GPS receiver that conforms to the NMEA 0183 protocol
standard. GPS support is not provided for LogBook/300.
GPS receivers must be purchased separately, and are available from a variety of sources. If purchasinga GPS make sure it conforms to the NMEA 0183 protocol standard.

LogBook Hardware Configuration
Reference Note: Refer to chapter 6, GPS & Serial Device Data Collection, for detailed information.

Calculated-Channel Configuration
LogBook can derive virtual channels from real and/or virtual channels using math operators andfunctions. The resulting virtual channels can be used to:• Create alarms based on any combination of signal levels from real channels and logical ormathematical functions of virtual channels• Reduce data through statistical operations, comparisons, etc.
• Develop sophisticated trigger equations using a series of averaging, comparing of other real andvirtual channels• Manipulate input channel values for a more useful output (perhaps the quantity of interest cannot
be measured directly but depends on a complex derivation from several measurements)• Control external devices via digital output signals (like a simple Programmable Logic
Controller)

LV-36

LogView

989592

Software ReferenceNote:

Calculated channels can have numeric values such as analog channel values. Calculated channels
can also have digital values of 0 or 1. These channels can be stored in any one (or all 4) timebases
set up in the Acquisition Configuration Window, in the same manner as other input channels.
User Input Box(Appears as needed)

Equation
Assistant

Add New
Channel

Cut

Paste

Calculated Channel Configuration Windows with Calculation Function Examples
You can access the Calculated Channel Configuration window from the control window’s View pull-down
menu, or by using the Calc (fx) button. The window contains several columns that are easy to understandbecause of their labels, and their similarity to columns previously discussed. The Calculation Function
column is a noted exception that is explained via the following four examples.
Note:

Channel ID and Physical Channel nomenclature appear in the Calculation Function column. User
Labels will not appear in the function column unless they are identical to a Channel ID, or a
Physical Channel label.

Refer to the above screen shots for the examples which follow.
In addition to understanding the equation aspect of the following examples, you should
also note the differences between the two types of configuration screens; i.e., an actual(real) channel and the calculated (virtual) channel.
Reference Note: You may wish to refer to math or programming books to derive calculation
functions that suit your specific application.
Equation Assistant
The following window is opened by the F(x) button on the Calculated Channel Configuration window.
The Equation assistant helps to ensure that the proper syntax is used in the Calculation Function column.
Selecting the corresponding math and logic operators will enter the corresponding commands (thesecommands can also be typed in, but using the equation assistant can minimize syntax mistakes).
No recursion. A calculated channel cannot refer to itself directly or indirectly bycreating a loop of inter-related calculations.

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-37

Equation Assistant Dialog Box
Equation Assistant Function Buttons
Arithmetic(subtraction)+(addition)

*

/

%

^
1

(multiplication)(division)(modulus)(exponentiation)

Relational and Equality

<=

>=

<

>

==

!=

(less than orequal to)(greater thanor equal to)(less than)(greater than)(equal)(not equal)

BitwiseNote: Bitwise functions are briefly discussed in the text which immediately follows this table.

&

|

~

<<

>>

(Bitwise And)

(Bitwise Or)(Bitwise Not)

(Shift Left)(Shift Right)

LogicalAnd

Note: Logical functions are briefly discussed in the related text which follows this table.

Or

Not

1

Note: Modulus has several possible meanings. As used in the equation assistant, modulus is the remainder which
results when the first operand is divided by the second. For example: the modulus for 3 % 3 is 0; the modulus
for 3.257 % 3 is 0.257; and the modulus for 5 % 2 is 1.0.

LV-38

LogView

989592

Software ReferenceBitwise Operators
The bitwise operators perform bitwise-AND (&), bitwise-OR (|), and bitwise-Not (~) operations.
SyntaxAND-expression & equality-expression
OR-expression | Not-expression
Not-expression ~ AND-expression
The operands of bitwise operators must have integral types, but their types can be different. These
operators perform the usual arithmetic conversions; the type of the result is the type of the operands afterconversion.

& The bitwise-AND operator compares each bit of its first operand to the corresponding bit of its second
operand. If both bits are 1, the corresponding result bit is set to 1. Otherwise, the corresponding result
bit is set to 0.
Example: 10110000 & 10010000 = = 10010000|

The bitwise-OR operator compares each bit of its first operand to the corresponding bit of its second
operand. The operator is inclusive in that, if either bit is 1, the corresponding result bit is set to 1.
Otherwise, the corresponding result bit is set to 0.
Example: 10110000 | 10010000 = = 10110000~ The bitwise-NOT operator creates a bitwise compliment of its operand. Thus, a 0 switches to 1, and a
1 switches to 0.
Example: ~ 10110000 = = 01001111
Bitwise Left Shift and Right Shift Operators: <<, >>Syntax:
shift-expression << additive-expression
shift-expression >> additive-expression
The bitwise shift operators shift their first operand left (<<) or right (>>) by the number of positions thesecond operand specifies.
Example: 10110000 << 2 = = 11000000

Logical Operators
The logical operators perform logical AND, logical OR, and logical NOT operations.
Logical operators do not perform usual arithmetic conversions. Instead, they evaluate each operand interms of its equivalence to 0. Thus, the result of a logical operation is either 0 or 1.
AND The logical-AND operator produces the value 1 if both operands have nonzero values. If either
operand is equal to 0, the result is 0. If the first operand of a logical-AND operation is equal to 0,
the second operand is not evaluated.
OR

The logical-OR operator performs an inclusive-OR operation on its operands. The result is 0 if
both operands have 0 values. If either operand has a nonzero value, the result is 1. If the first
operand of a logical-OR operation has a nonzero value, the second operand is not evaluated.
The operands of logical-AND and logical-OR expressions are evaluated from left to right. If thevalue of the first operand is sufficient to determine the result of the operation, the second operandis not evaluated. This is called "short-circuit evaluation."

NOT The logical-negation (logical-NOT) operator produces the value 0 if its operand is true (nonzero)and the value 1 if its operand is false (0). The operand must be an integral, floating, or pointervalue.

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-39

Examples of Calculated Channels

Example 1: P1_CH14 > 23
In this example the user wants to use CALC_00 as a logic indicator based on the state of physical channel
P1_CH14; thus channel CALC_00 will read 1 or 0, depending on the value of the physical channel’s
reading.
The user created a calculation function: P1_CH14 > 23. The calculation channel is labeled CALC_00 asseen in the following figure.
Assume P1_CH14 had a reading of 26.13. Since 26.13 is greater than the value 23 in the calculation
function, CALC_00’s reading would appear as 1.0. If the channel P1_CH14 reading drops to 23 or lower,
CALC_00 will read 0.0. Note that CALC_00 can be used in additional equations as will be seen in
example 2.
To obtain a calculation channel, select the Calculated Channel Configuration window’s Edit pull-down
menu, then select Add Channel. In regard to the calculation function column, the following steps
highlight how to enter the function used in this first example, i.e., P1_CH14>23.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Ensure the physical channel to be referenced is enabled. In this case: P1_CH14.
Use the Calc (y = fx) button in the toolbar or Calculated Channels from the View pull-down menu toaccess the Calculated Channel Configuration Window.
Select the Edit pull-down menu (located on the Calculated Channel Configuration window).
Select Add New to add a calculation channel. In our first example this is CALC_00.
Click on the cell in the Calculation Function Column.
A F(x) button appears by the Enter Function Expression dialog box.
Use the F(x) button to access the Equation Assistance dialog box.
In the Equation Assistant box, double-click on the desired reference channel. P1_CH14. This entry
will appear in the equation box, located just below the title bar. Note that you may type the channel,
and other equation entries in this box, if desired.
From the Relational and Equality buttons (<=, >=, <, >, = =, !=) select the “greater than” symbol (>).
This entry will appear in the equation box.

Equation Assistant Dialog Box
9. With the cursor placed after the greater than symbol (>), type 23.
10. Verify that your function appears correctly and click the <Validate> button. Validate will verify thatyou have a useable equation and will inform you when there is a problem with an equation. For
example, you may have a missing parenthesis.
11. If necessary, correct your equation and validate the new one.
12. Click the <OK> button. This closes the Equation Assistant.
LV-40

LogView

989592

Software ReferenceThough the previous ten steps pertain to the first example, aside from functional differences, the method isessentially the same for the remaining three examples. A figure and table have been placed after theexamples to identify various button options available with the Equation Assistant.

Example 2: CALC_00 And(P1_CH15>24)

Look at row 2 in the Calculated Channel Configuration screen above. You will see that the user created a
calculation function of CALC_00 And(P1_CH15 > 24) for the calculation channel having the channel ID
of CALC_01. In this example the user wants to use CALC_01 as a logic indicator based on the state ofboth CALC_00 and physical channel P1_CH15.
In this example, channel CALC_01 will read 1 if both of the following are true:a) CALC_00 has a value of 1.0b) P1_CH15 has a value greater than 24
Assume that P1_CH14 had a channel reading of 23.09 and that P1_CH15 had a value of 21.81. In thiscase, CALC_00 will have a value of 1.0 because P1_CH14 is greater than 23. P1_CH14>23 was set inexample 1.
In our example 2 function of CALC_00 And(P1_CH15>24) it is clear that although the first condition issatisfied, we can see that the second is not, since P1_CH15 has a reading of 21.81. Because bothconditions are not satisfied, CALC_01 reads 0.0. Note that CALC_01 can be used in additional equations.

Example 3: P1_CH14+P1_CH15
Look at row 3 in the Calculated Channel Configuration screen (previous figure). You will see that the user
created a calculation function of P1_CH14+P1_CH15 for the calculation channel having the channel ID of
CALC_02. In this example the user wants to use CALC_02 to indicate to sum of two physical channels,i.e., P1_CH14 and P1_CH15.
In this example, assume that:a) P1_CH14 reads 25 volts, andb) P1_CH15 reads 24 volts
In this case CALC_02 will be the sum, 49 volts.
Note that CALC_02 can be used in additional equations.

Example 4: P1_CH14*2
Look at row 4 in the Calculated Channel Configuration screen (previous figure). You will see that the user
created a simple calculation function of P1_CH14*2 for calculation channel CALC_03. In this example
the user wants CALC_03 to read twice the value of physical channel P1_CH14.
Note that CALC_03 can be used in additional equations.

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-41

Acquisition Configuration
The Acquisition Configuration dialog box allows you to define trigger conditions including various
parameters for pre-trigger, trigger, post-trigger, scan rate and timebase.
LogBook data can be collected in two basic ways depending on the trigger setup:• Continuous. As a simple data logger in a strip chart mode, all data collected is then saved. The
trigger source can be set to immediate and the post-trigger scan count set to infinite.
• Exception-only. As an exception-capturing system, collected data is saved only under specified
conditions. Pre-trigger, post-trigger, and re-arm parameters allow you to collect only data around
specified events, just the data of interest, nothing more. Thus memory is conserved, and post-analysis
is easier.
The next figure shows a time line with data being collected continuously, but only the trigger block islogged to memory (the pre-trigger and post-trigger data combined is called a trigger block).

Trigger Parameters Setup
The following figures represent Trigger Setups with and Analog Channel as a trigger source(channel P1_CH14) and a Calculated Channel as a trigger source (CALC_00).
Other possible trigger sources are:
When Armed, Manual, Digital Channel, GPS Channel (LogBook/360 only), and Absolute Time.

Trigger Setup Using an Analog Channel

Trigger Setup Using a Calculated Channel

The manual trigger can be implemented in the following ways:• With a PC attached, you can trigger LogBook from LogView’s LogBook Monitor window in the
Device menu.
• Without a PC, you can use the Remote LogBook Terminal (LBK1) <Manual Trigger> button.
The auto re-arm feature allows for a large number of acquisitions to take place automatically, with eachacquisition using the same settings. As soon as the previous trigger block is terminated, the system
immediately re-arms itself, waiting for the trigger condition to be satisfied. The Number of Re-arms field
allows you to specify how many triggered acquisitions to capture. For exception-capturing, specify the
number of trigger blocks that should be collected before data logging is terminated. For continuous data
logging, specify 1 trigger block.

LV-42

LogView

989592

Software Reference

If Absolute Time is selected for the trigger source, thewindow changes as shown in the figure at right. The
parameters include the date and time as well as options
for re-triggering after a specified duration.
A wide variety of trigger sources and stop events provide
great flexibility in exception-capturing. If data collection
is desired only under specific conditions, appropriate
trigger conditions can be so specified. Besides thetrigger event, you can define a pre-trigger and posttrigger for the trigger block. An example of exceptioncapturing would be to collect 100 pre-trigger scans and1000 post-trigger scans every time a designated channel
read a specified temperature.

Using Absolute Time as a Trigger Source

To conserve memory when collecting high-speed data, use the trigger to take snapshots of
information only during the appropriate periods.
When using a trigger to start the acquisition, a pre-trigger count can be supplied so that information justbefore the trigger can be collected and saved (LogBook’s buffer allows pre-trigger data to be stored
temporarily until saved in a trigger block). The post-trigger definition specifies when the data collection
activity should end.

Pre-Trigger Setup

Post-Trigger Setup

You can also use a calculated channel as a trigger source, but you must use an analog output or digitalchannel as an intermediary. The calculated channel can be based on real channels and user logic to createan analog output channel or a digital output channel that could then be the input for the trigger event or
stop event. A calculated channel can describe virtually any combination of channel conditions. For
example, you can develop a calculated channel called TRIG and specify it as the trigger channel. If thechannel’s equation is TRIG = (Temp1-Temp2)>50.0°, the data collection process will be triggered when
the difference between the 2 channels is greater than 50.0°.
Scan Rate Setup

Scan Rate Setup. Accomplished on the right-half of the Acquisition Configuration Window.

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-43

The Scan Rate block is the right half of the Acquisition Configuration window (see previous figure).
To set the scan rate, you can use LogBook’s “internal” clock, or an “external” clock. Brief descriptions
follow.
Note: The scan-to-scan time is not recorded when tracking variable-speed events.
•

Internal Clock. The scan-to-scan timing may be set by a fixed-frequency pacer clock.
LogBook’s time-of-day clock has 1/16-second resolution for data-logging applications whereacquisitions must be performed at specific times during the day. The time of occurrence for eachacquisition and its trigger are recorded with the data. The internal clock can be reset in the
LogBook Monitor window in the Device menu.

•

External Clock. Each scan may be individually started by an external TTL level trigger toallow the scan rate to track an external, variable-speed event (such as engine revolutions). The
external clock signal is applied to LogBook through pin 20 of the P1 DB37 Analog I/O connector.
The P1 pinout is included in chapter 4.
Question: Why is the Pin 20 [for the external clock] identified as PCRCLK output/input?
Answer: When LogBook is set for an external user-supplied pacer, pin 20 has an input function.
When LogBook is set to make use of its internal FPGA (Frequency Pulse Gain Amplifier)supplied pacer, pin 20 is driven as an output. This allows instrumentation external to LogBook to
be triggered in sync with LogBook scans.
Question: On what edge is the sample taken? Rising or Falling?
Answer: Rising edge, low-to-high direction, where the minimum pulse high-time equals the low
time (100nsec).

For applications with both slow and fast phenomena, sampling slow signals at a slower rate while
maintaining high rates for fast signals will conserve memory. For example, channel 1 may read fast signals
like vibration and can be sampled at the high (base) rate; channel 2 may read slow signals likethermocouples and can be sampled at a lower rate. A Base Rate A and up to 3 more rates (B, C, D) can be
configured; but only one base rate can be defined for the entire system and it should be set for the fastest
scan required. The B, C, D rates must be integer (whole number) divisions of the base rate. It is also
possible to scan the same channel at several rates.
Note: A separately indexed data file is created for each scan rate.
The checkbox “Apply noise reduction averaging” refers to auto-averaging for scan rates B, C, and D.
All channels are scanned at the base rate; but they may also be scanned at divisions of the base rate. Twoadvantages to averaging are noise reduction by limiting the effect of extraneous readings and storagesavings since fewer values are stored.
• Averaging. Checking this box, the readings from the base rate will be averaged, and the averagevalue will be entered for the derived rate scan. If the scan rate B is ¼ of the base rate A,
then four A readings will be averaged for each B reading.
• No averaging. Not checking this box, the readings at the derived scan rates will be exactly the samefor that time-point as the base rate.
Event Marking/Time Stamping
The top right side of the Acquisition Configuration window allows you to manually mark events and/or
insert an absolute time reference for each scan:• Enable Event Mark sets up the acquisition for an operator to press the <Event Mark> button in the
LogBook Monitor window or on the LBK1 remote operation terminal. Whenever the button ispressed, that data point is added to the data file.
• Enable Time Stamp sets up the acquisition to automatically add the time (to ms) and date to the data
file for every scan.

LV-44

LogView

989592

Software ReferencePreferences(no toolbar
icon)

LogView allows you to set various
parameters to make your application
more useful and convenient. These
preference settings are divided into
4 tabs as shown in the figures on theright.
Most of the options cover default use
of filenames and validating changes tofiles.

LogView Preferences, General Tab Selected

LogView Preferences, Download Tab Selected
As explained in the File Management
section (see page LV- 8), LogView cangenerate multiple data files for an
acquisition and then automaticallyname them. These names have a longformat with several fields (seed, serial
number, date armed, time armed,
trigger block/segment). Unless youneed the long-format name to prevent
file overwrites, you can uncheck thefields you don’t need. For example, if
only using one LogBook, the serial
number is not needed.

LogView Preferences, Upload Tab Selected

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-45

For data conversion:
1) Select the LogView Preferences “General Tab.”
2) Click on the <File Converter> button. The File Converter Preferences dialog box appears.
3) Select the formats you want to save your data in.
4) If desired, check to automatically delete the source data file after conversion. The default avoids
automatic deletion of the source data file.
5) Select the overwriting-related preference you desire. The default is to “Validate overwriting of eachexisting file.”

File Converter Preferences Dialog Box

LV-46

LogView

989592

Software ReferenceDevice Menu
Select PC Card
Select LogBook
AttachBreak
Arm Acquisition
Stop Acquisition
LogBook Monitor
Explorer

Select
PC-Card(no toolbar icon)

The Device menu allows you to choose devices in your system, attach or break connection to thesystem, and to start and stop an acquisition.

Select PC-Card allows you to choose which driveon your computer you wish to make active for
uploading and downloading—especially relevant if
your computer has more than one PC-Card slot.
Select PC-Card

SelectLogBook

Select LogBook allows you to choose devices fromyour system and then verify or change thecommunication port settings.

(no toolbar icon)

Select LogBook

Attach allows you to establish connection with a LogBook. If no LogBook is connected, LogView willautomatically attach to a PC-Card in the user-specified PC-Card drive(specified in the “Select PC-Card” dialog box).

Break allows you to break the connection with an attached LogBook.

Arm Acquisition Arms the acquisition for the selected device. The scan will begin when the selected
trigger condition is met.

Stop Acquisition will disarm the acquisition for the selected device. No data will be collected despite
trigger conditions until the acquisition is armed (started).

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-47

LogBook Monitor(has no toolbar
icon; it is selectedfrom Device Menu
only)

When selected from LogView’s Device pull-down menu, the LogBook Monitor provides a system status
report on the current acquisition (if in progress). The acquisition status is only updated every 1 or 2
seconds. Note that the status for scans at faster rates may not be updated before the scan is finished.
Most of the monitor’s information is self-explanatory. Items that may not be obvious, or which may needadditional explanation are discussed below.

LogBook Monitor(1) Event Mark - Whenever you click the <Event Mark> button during an acquisition, LogView notes theexact time to time-correlate the marked instant with data collected then. This function is like marking
a strip chart to draw attention to a particular time frame. These marks can be seen later while
reviewing the data in an independent view application.
The <Event Mark> button will only be enabled when the Acquisition Configuration window’s “Enable
Event Mark” function is selected (see following figure). The event-marking feature is also accessible
via LBK1.

Selecting “Enable Event Mark” in the Acquisition Configuration Window(2) Clock – Shows the current time, according to LogBook’s clock.
(3) Max Swap Time (Maximum Disk Swap Time) – is the estimated amount of time available forremoving and replacing LogBook’s PCMCIA card without interruption to LogBook’s active
acquisition.
(4) Error - The Error box contains an error number and brief description of the error, should an error
exist. Error codes are provided near the end of this manual. Not all errors are detrimental to theacquisition.
(5) Reset Clock – Resets LogBook’s clock to value of the host PC’s clock.

LV-48

LogView

989592

Software Reference(6) Manual Trigger – Clicking the <Manual Trigger> button immediately activates the trigger or posttrigger event. This feature is also accessible via the LBK1 device.
(7) Explorer – Clicking the <Explorer> button accesses LogBook’s Explorer, which allows you to search
the PC-Card for acquisition files and the indexed trigger blocks within the acquisition files. The
Explorer can be accessed from LogView’s Device pull-down menu. The following section provides
more detail.

Explorer(has no toolbar
icon; it is selectedfrom the Device
Menu or the
LogBook Monitor)

The Explorer window can be reached from the Device menu or from the <Explorer> button in the
LogBook Monitor window. Explorer allows you to search the PC-Card for acquisition files and theindexed trigger blocks within the acquisition files. The Exploring windows look first at the acquisitions
saved to disk and then deeper into each trigger block within an acquisition.
The convention for naming files is described on page LV- 9. In the following example (see figure below),
TriggerBlock_2-2 uses “TriggerBlock” as the seed and “2-2” to indicate the 2nd segment of the 2nd trigger
block. The binary data file ends with the .bin extension understood in the LogView Explorer.

LogBook Explorer Window, Two Examples

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-49

Tools Menu
Convert Binary
Data
Merge Binary Data
View Data

The Tools menu provides three selections:• Convert Binary Data - allows you to convert raw binary data (*.bin files) into other formats
that you may find more useful.
• Merge Binary Data – allows you to merge Rate files and to concatenate Trigger Blocksegments.
• View Data – Accesses the independent view program for graphing and analysis of previously
recorded data.
The Convert Binary Data menu option allows you to convert raw binary data (*.bin files) into other

Convertformats that you may find more useful. You must first select an existing binary file to be converted.
Binary Data The filename can be typed in or selected by the <Browse> button that leads to a folder/file searchwindow. After a file is selected (or multiple files), you can toggle check-boxes on/off for each format
type. When ready to begin the conversion, select the <Convert> button and set up the destination
folder/filename.

(no toolbar
icon)

Data collected with LogBook can be uploaded to your PC’s hard disk in any or all of several data
formats for post-acquisition analysis. Some of the available file formats include Snap Master,DADiSP, Matlab, and ASCII (Excel) which is compatible with most software for analysis. LogView
creates the necessary header files for each data format so that the software can use the channel labels,
the timebase information, and other parameters.
Converted data files are placed in format-specific subdirectories of the binary source file directory.
Rates, Trigger Blocks, and Segments
LogBook has the capacity to save channel data at four independent rates. For each enabled rate, a file iscreated. For example, if all four rates are being used, four files will be present after an upload. Dependingon the Upload Preference settings (as discussed in Preferences, page LV- 45), the file names will look
similar to the following.
TEST R1 B1-1.BIN
TEST R2 B1-1.BIN
TEST R3 B1-1.BIN
TEST R4 B1-1.BIN“TEST” is the name of the acquisition configuration.
“Rn” shows the rate number. R1 through R4 is Rate1 through Rate 4.
“Bn-m” shows the trigger block and segment numbers.
For example, B1-1 indicates “Block1, Segment 1.”

Note: Files with high rates take up more memory than files with slow rates.
Auto Re-arm is used when multiple trigger events need to be captured. When the auto re-arm feature isenabled, LogBook will arm itself, wait for a trigger, collect the pre- and post-trigger, then re-arm itself
and repeat the process.
The pre- and post-trigger data surrounding a trigger point is called a Trigger Block. A new file iscreated for each Trigger Block. If only one rate is used and three Trigger Blocks are collected, the filenames would look similar to the following.
In each case, R1 indicates Rate 1. B1, B2, and B3 indicate Trigger
TEST R1 B1-1.BIN
Blocks 1, 2, and 3, respectively. The “-1”, in each case, indicates
TEST R1 B2-1.BIN
Segment 1.
TEST R1 B3-1.BIN
Uploads can be performed while data is being collected. For applications that require continuous
acquisition, uploads can be performed periodically to make space for additional data. Each uploaded
portion of a single Trigger Block is called a Segment. If one rate is used and a Trigger Block was
uploaded in five Segments, the file names would look similar to the following.
In each case, R1 indicates Rate 1. B1 indicates Trigger Block 1, andTEST R1 B1-1.BIN“-1” through “-5” indicates Segment 1 through Segment 5.
TEST R1 B1-2.BIN
TEST R1 B1-3.BIN
TEST R1 B1-4.BIN
TEST R1 B1-5.BIN

LV-50

LogView

989592

Software ReferenceMerging and Concatenating
LogView’s raw binary format can not be used by other programs; however, LogView can convert its data files into
popular file formats used by other display and analysis packages. The conversion can be performed automaticallyduring an upload, or manually after the upload using the Convert Binary Data utility (found under the Tools pulldown menu).
In addition to providing for file format conversion, the Convert Binary Data utility also has the ability to merge
Rate files and to concatenate Trigger Block segments. Examples follow shortly.
•••

When merging Rate files, the utility takes the appropriate rate files and combines them into one file.
When concatenating segments, the utility joins the appropriate segment files, making one continuous
Trigger Block file.
When both Merge and Concatenate are enabled, Trigger blocks with multiple rates (that were uploaded insegments) can all be consolidated into one file.

The Convert Binary Data utility lists all the raw binary files in the DATA directory. Select the desired file(s) andclick Convert to initiate the process. In this way, any Trigger Block, Segment, or Rate file can be individuallyconverted.

Sample Screen from the Convert Binary Data Utility

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-51

Merging Binary Data(no toolbar icon)

Preparing to Merge Subrates
A screen similar to that shown in the above figure appears when the “Merge Binary Data” is selected from the Tools
pull-down menu. On this window, when the Merge Subrates box is checked, the Convert Binary Data utility
groups the related Rate files together and displays a single item. In the example below this single item is:
TEST R* B1-1.BIN.
The number of files that this item describes is now shown in size column of the list box (4 files). Selecting
TEST R* B1-1.BIN and then clicking the <Execute> button (lower right) will convert and merge the files.
TEST R1 B1-1.BIN --------Æ TEST R* B1-1.BIN
TEST R2 B1-1.BIN |TEST R3 B1-1.BIN |TEST R4 B1-1.BIN __|Concatenating (Linking) Segments

LV-52

LogView

989592

Software ReferenceFile Convert Utility Screen Shown Both Before and After Selecting “Concatenate Segments”
When the Concatenate Segments box is checked, the File Convert utility groups the Segment files together anddisplays a single item. In the example, the single item is TEST R1 B1-*.BIN. The number of files that this item
describes is now shown in size column of the list box (5 files). Selecting TEST R1 B1-*.BIN and then clicking the<Execute> button (lower right of utility) will both convert and concatenate the files.
TEST R1 B1-1.BIN --------Æ TEST R1 B1-*.BIN
TEST R1 B1-2.BIN |TEST R1 B1-3.BIN |TEST R1 B1-4.BIN |TEST R1 B1-5.BIN __|Note: For applications that require continuous data collection, the Upload Scheduler can periodically upload thedata to a local PC, creating new space on the LogBook’s PC-Card. The Upload Scheduler is discussed inchapter 7.

View Data

Software Reference

The <View Data> button launches an independent post-data acquisition view program, if installed.
Examples of view programs are eZ-PostView and the eZ-Analyst set of view applications. The Post
Acquisition Data Analysis User’s Guide PDF documents the applicable application(s). The PDF
document is automatically installed onto your computer’s hard-drive as a part of LogBook productsupport at the time of software installation.

989592

LogView

LV-53

Indicators Menu
Bar Graph Meters
Analog Meters
Digital Meters
Enable Input Reading Column
Start All Indicators
Stop All Indicators

Bar Graph
Meters(no toolbar
icon)

AnalogMeters(no toolbar
icon)

LV-54

LogView

Along with displaying channel data in real time in the setup spreadsheets, LogView also
provides auxiliary real-time indicators.
The meter windows simulate the look of popular meter types: the bar graph, the analog
dial, and the digital readout. Within each meter type, you can adjust their display
properties to fit your needs. Such properties include number of channels, high/low
limits, peak hold, trend indicator, etc.
Next, each meter type is shown; and then, their configuration is discussed (they all workin a similar way).

Selecting the Bar Graph Meter iconbrings up the Bar Graph window todisplay several channels in bar graphformat. To activate the display, selectthe <Start> button on the left side of thetoolbar (or Start All Indicators in thepull-down menu or in the toolbar). You
can vary the number of channels(32 max) displayed by selecting the
input box at the end of the toolbar. The<Grid> button (next to last item on
toolbar) is used to arrange the display
for convenient reading. The pushpin
icon in the center of the toolbar locks
this window on top of other windows
until you unlock it by selecting the
pushpin again.

Selecting the Analog Meter icon brings
up the Analog Meters window to display
several channels in a dial/gage format.
To activate the display, select the<Start> button on the left side of thetoolbar (or Start All Indicators in thepull-down menu or in the toolbar). You
can vary the number of channels (32max) displayed by selecting the input
box at the end of the toolbar. The<Grid> button (next to last item on
toolbar) is used to arrange the display
for convenient reading. The pushpin
icon in the center of the toolbar locks
this window on top of other windows
until you unlock it by selecting the
pushpin again.

989592

Software ReferenceDigital
Meters(no toolbar
icon)

Selecting the Digital Meters icon brings
up the Digital Meters window to display
several channels in numeric format. To
activate the display, select the <Start>
button on the left side of the toolbar (orStart All Indicators in the pull-downmenu or in the toolbar). You can vary the
number of channels (32 max) displayedby selecting the input box at the end of
the toolbar. The <Grid> button (next tolast item on toolbar) is used to arrange thedisplay for convenient reading. The
pushpin icon in the center of the toolbar
locks this window on top of otherwindows until you unlock it by selecting
the pushpin again.

Meters Configuration
The toolbars and pull-down menus for the three metertypes are identical except that Digital Meters does nothave a Reset Peak Hold icon.

Item

Name
Start

Meters Toolbar Icons
FunctionStarts meters.

Stop

Stops meters.

Reset Peak Hold
Indicator

Resets the floating markers. Upon reset, the markers will instantly adjust to
indicate the highest and lowest values reached since the time of the reset.
This feature does not apply to the Digital Meters.
Locks or unlocks the meter window on top of other windows.

Stay On Top(Push pin)
Print

Sends the meter(s) display image to connected printer.

Rows x Columns

Opens a small menu with “row x column” arrangement options. Example: Whenthe number of meters is 6 the grid options will be: 6x1, 3x2, 2x3, and 2x4 withthe first number being the number of rows. If you then select 3x2 you will have3 rows of meters with 2 meters per row.
Specifies the number of meters to appear on the screen.
Up to 32 meters can be selected.

Number of Meters

The meters windows each have a Control and View pull-down menu, as indicated by the following figure.
These menu items correspond to the toolbar icons described above.

Software Reference

989592

LogView

LV-55

A meters configuration menu (lower left corner of figure) will appear when you place the mouse pointerover a meter and click the right mouse button. This menu allows you to access various dialog boxes forchanging parameters for meters. The steps for configuring a meter are detailed below.
Note: The Show Peak Hold Indicator / Reset Peak Hold Indicator selections are not an option for Digital
Meters and do not appear on the configuration window for digital meters.

Meter Configuration Menu and Related Dialog Boxes
Configuring a Meter
1.

Bring up the desired meter group (Bar Graph, Analog, or Digital).

2.

Place the mouse cursor over the meter to reconfigure.

3.

Click on the right mouse button. A Meters Configuration Menu will appear (see figure above).

4.

Select the desired option from the meter configuration menu.

5.

If a dialog box is required, for example, to change a limit, enter in the new value in the appropriate
parameter box and press “Apply” or “OK.” Pressing “Apply” implements your changes, but keeps
the dialog box open, allowing you to make additional changes. Pressing “OK” implements yourchanges and closes the dialog box.

The previous figure and the next table and the previous figure serve as a quick reference to meters
configuration.

LV-56

LogView

989592

Software ReferenceFunction
Select Channel

Set ScaleShow Peak Hold
Indicator
Reset Peak Hold
Indicator
Show Trend
Indicator
Set Limits
Show Limits

Properties

Configure Meter Settings, Function Descriptions
Description
Select a new channel for display. The selected channel will replace the one
currently seen in the meter. Note that double-clicking the left mouse button in themeter region will also bring up a dialog box which allows you to select a newchannel.
Set the high and low points of the scale as well as define the decimal place format.
Places high and low uni-directional floating markers on the scale to indicate thehighest and lowest values reached up to the present time. This feature does not
apply to the Digital Meters selection.
Resets the floating markers. Upon reset, the markers will instantly adjust to indicate
the highest and lowest values reached since the time of the reset. This featuredoes not apply to the Digital Meters selection.
Displays a pointer to indicate the direction of the trend. Note that during rapid meter
fluctuations the increase and decrease pointers will appear to blink
simultaneously.
Provides a way of establishing high and low limit set-points.
Displays limits by adding color (red for high, blue for low) to the scale regions whichequal and exceed the set limit values. For Digital Meters the limits are indicatedby red numbers and an upper red bar for hitting or exceeding the high limit; andblue numbers and a lower blue bar when reaching or exceeding the low limit.
Allows setting and showing limits, as well as opening the Scale dialog box.

You can access a different dialog box from the one initially selected. For example, from the Set Scaledialog box you can select Limits to access the Set Limits/Show Limits display, as well as select “Misc.”
which allows you to “Show Trend Indicator” and “Show Peak Hold Indicators.”
Mouse buttons• Left: Double-clicking the left mouse button in a meters scale area brings up a channel selection popup menu.
• Right: Single-clicking the right mouse button in a meters scale area brings up a configuration pop-up
menu.

Enable Input Reading Column(no toolbar
icon)This command enables/disables the “Reading” column of the Analog Input Channel Configuration
spreadsheet to provide a numeric view of incoming data. This function toggles on and off when themenu item is repeatedly selected.
Note:With the input reading columns ON, no modifications to program parameters may be
performed.

Start (or Stop) All Indicators(no toolbar
icon)

Starting or Stopping all indicators affects several windows if open, including: Reading column,
Charts, Bar Graph Meters, Analog Meters, and Digital Meters.
Note:

Software Reference

You can start or stop any of these active windows separately using their own Start or Stop
(Pause) buttons.

989592

LogView

LV-57

This page is intentionally blank.

LV-58

LogView

989592

Software ReferenceAppendix A

A

A Supplement to the HopNet 10 Series Wireless Modems User’s Manual
Introduction ….. A-1
Hardware Setup ….. A-1
Configuration via LogBook Software …… A-2
Testing the LogBook and Modem Connectivity …… A-4
Setting HopNet Modems for Base and Remote Operations …… A-7
Frequently Asked Questions …… A-9

Introduction
This document serves as a supplement to the HopNet 10 Series Wireless Modems User’s Manual. It
provides instructions for configuring Logbook/300 and LogBook/360 devices to enable RS232
communications via a HopNet wireless modem, using standard Serial Protocol and Serial Fixed Baud Rate
Protocol.
Note that the HopNet 10 Series modems are transparent to LogView, and that no commands are necessary
for using Cirronet’s HopNet modems with LogView.
Reference Note:
The HopNet 10 Series Wireless Modems User’s Manual is, at the time of this writing, shippedwith HopNet 10 Series devices. Be sure to read that document before proceeding with thisappendix. Note that HopNet devices and the associated user’s manual are properties of
CirronetTM, Inc. Additional information can be found at their web-site: www.cirronet.com.

Hardware Setup
Required Equipment•

Logbook/300 or LogBook/360 with a PCMCIA Card
(Type I, II, or III hard disk card, or ATA flash-memory solid-state card)•

Parallel Port Cable, for use in setup configuration•

Two CA-212 Serial cables (9 pin to 9 pin), for continuous modem use•

One CA-47, PC/AT/XT Serial Port to RS-232/422 Cable, for testing serial connection baud rate;
Temporary use.

•

Two HopNet Modems, one Base and one Remote, to provide an extended serial communication
systemPhysical Setup of Hardware
This supplement is not a substitute for the HopNet 10 Series Wireless Modems User’s Manual, nor does it
duplicate the hardware setup information that has been created by Cirronet, Inc. You will need to set up
your hardware in accordance with the Cirronet document. After doing so, configure the LogBook formodem serial communication according to the following section, Configuration via LogBook Software.
Reference Note:
Refer to the HopNet 10 Series Wireless Modems User’s Manual for hardware-related details
regarding HopNet devices. Additional information can be found at: www.cirronet.com.
LogBook User’s Manual, Appendix A

887997

Supplement / HopNet Modems

A-1

Configuration via LogBook Software
In order to accommodate the necessary configurations, we must specify alias names in the Logbook
Configuration Applet.
In the LogBook Configuration Applet [located in the Windows Control Panel] we will see four “Port
Setups.” Each will need configured to ensure proper serial port communications via the HopNet modem.
The four devices are:
• Parallel Port Setup – necessary to establish communication for setting up the serial port
• Serial Port Setup – this is the “Standard Serial Port Setup” for LogBook• Serial Port Fixed Baud Rate Setup – for LogBook• Serial Port Fixed Baud Rate Setup – for HopNet

Configure the “Parallel Port Setup” for Device: LogBook Parallel
1.

Navigate from the Windows Desktop as follows:
Start ⇒ Settings ⇒ Control Panel ⇒ LogBook Config

2.

Double-click on the LogBook Config icon to open the applet.

3.

Click <Add Device>.

4.

Set the Properties, via the LogBook Properties Tab, as follows:
Device Name: LogBook Parallel
Connection Type: Parallel Port
Device Connection: LPT1
Protocol: ECP

5.

Click the <APPLY> button.

6.

Click the <OK> button.

Configure the “Serial Port Setup” for Device: LogBook Serial
1.

From the LogBook Configuration Applet, click <Add Device>.

2.

Set the Properties, via the LogBook Properties Tab, as follows:
Device Name: LogBook Serial
Connection Type: Serial Port
Device Connection: COM1
Protocol: RS232

3.

Set the Properties via the Port Settings Tab, as follows:
Bits per second: 38400
Flow control: Hardware

4.

Click the <APPLY> button.

5.

Click the <OK> button.

A-2 Supplement / HopNet Modems

887997

LogBook User’s Manual, Appendix A

Configure the “Serial Port Fixed Baud Rate Setup” for Device: LogBook Serial Fixed
1.

From the LogBook Configuration Applet, click <Add Device>.

2.

Set the Properties, via the LogBook Properties Tab, as follows:
Device Name: LogBook Serial Fixed
Connection Type: Serial Port (Fixed Baud)
Device Connection: COM1
Protocol: RS232

3.

Set the Properties via the Port Settings Tab, as follows:
Bits per second: 19200
Flow control: Hardware

4.

Click the <APPLY> button.

5.

Click the <OK> button.

Configure the “Serial Port Fixed Baud Rate Setup” for Device: LogBook HopNet
1.

From the LogBook Configuration Applet, click <Add Device>.

2.

Set the Properties, via the LogBook Properties Tab, as follows:
Device Name: LogBook HopNet
Connection Type: Serial Port (Fixed Baud)
Device Connection: COM1
Protocol: RS232

3.

Set the Properties via the Port Settings Tab, as follows:
Bits per second: 115200 (see Note 1)
Flow control: Hardware

4.

Click the <APPLY> button.

5.

Click the <OK> button.

Note 1: The bits per second, in step 3 above for device “LogBook HopNet” does not need to match thebits per second set for device “LogBook Serial Fixed.”

LogBook User’s Manual, Appendix A

887997

Supplement / HopNet Modems

A-3

Testing the LogBook and Modem Connectivity
In this section, steps are provided to:••••

Verify the Parallel Port connectivity.
Configure the LogBook’s Serial Connections. This configuration is done via Parallel Port
Verify that the Serial Fixed Baud Rate functions correctly
Use the HopNet Modems to connect the LogBook to the PC
Note: HopNet Modems are sometimes referred to as “serial extenders”

Verify “Parallel Port” Connectivity
The parallel port connection to the LogBook is used to configure all serial port connections. Thus thisverification is very important.
1.

Physically connect the LogBook to the PC using the Parallel Port cable.

2.

Launch LogView.

3.

In LogView, open the DEVICE pull-down menu.

4.

Click on the SELECT LOGBOOK option. A list of configured devices should display.

5.

Select “LogBook Parallel.”

6.

Click the <ATTACH> button.
Note that a successful connection is required to continue.

Configure the LogBook for “Serial Connections”
The following steps are performed to verify that the Serial Port can be used to connect the PC to the
LogBook.
1.

Using the RS232 cable, physically connect the LogBook to the PC’s COM1 Port.

2.

Launch LogView.

3.

In LogView, open the DEVICE pull-down menu.

4.

Click on the SELECT LOGBOOK option. A list of configured devices should display.

5.

Select “LogBook Serial.”

6.

Click the <ATTACH> button.
Note that a successful connection is required to continue.

A-4 Supplement / HopNet Modems

887997

LogBook User’s Manual, Appendix A

Test the “Serial Fixed Baud Rate” for the LogBook
Making the Initial Setup
1.

Make sure that the LogBook is still connected to the PC via Parallel Port cable.
If not, make the connection.

2.

Launch LogView.

3.

In LogView, open the DEVICE pull-down menu.

4.

Click on the SELECT LOGBOOK option. A list of configured devices should display.

5.

Select “LogBook Parallel.”

6.

Click the <ATTACH> button.

7.

Press the <H/W> button. This is the “Hardware Configuration” button. It is the first button in row
two of the LogView’s toolbar.

8.

Select the “Serial COM” node, in the dialog box that appears.

9.

Select the “Connection at Fixed Baud” option. This appears on the right side of the dialog box.

Configuring and Testing1.

Set the configuration properties and RTS Mode to the following values:
Configuration Properties
Connection: Connection at Fixed Baud
Baud Rate: 19200
Data Bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop Bits: 1
RTS Mode: Input Buffer Full

2.

Click <OK>.

3.

Click the <DOWNLOAD> button to transmit the configuration to the LogBook.

4.

Click the <DETACH> button.

5.

Turn LogBook’s power OFF. This is required to initialize the changes.
Failure to complete step 4 (Detach) and step 5 (Power OFF) will result in a
failure to initialize configuration changes.

6.

Turn the LogBook ON.

7.

Open the DEVICE pull-down menu item.

8.

Click on the SELECT LOGBOOK option.

9.

Select “LogBook Serial Fixed.”

Note: The Baud Rate is “19200.” It should match the baud rate set in step 1.
10. Click <ATTACH>.
Reference Note:
If this procedure was not successful, refer to the Frequently Asked Questions section on pageA-9 of this appendix.
Note that a successful connection is required to continue.

LogBook User’s Manual, Appendix A

887997

Supplement / HopNet Modems

A-5

Test the “Serial Fixed Baud Rate” for LogBook HopNet
Making the Initial Setup
1.

Using the 9-pin Serial cables (CA-212), connect a HopNet Modem to the PC’s COM1 port.

2.

Connect the second HopNet Modem to the LogBook’s COM Port. Note that this COM Port is usedfor LogBook serial communications
It is important that you use a CA-212 Cable for the Modem serial connections. If you
use a CA-47 Cable, improper signal connections will result.

3.

Make sure that the Parallel Port cable is still attached to the Logbook. This parallel connection will
be needed until the configuration is 100% complete.

4.

In LogView, open the DEVICE pull-down menu.

5.

Click on the SELECT LOGBOOK option. A list of configured devices should display.

6.

Select “LogBook Parallel.”

7.

Click the <ATTACH> button.

8.

Press the <H/W> button. This is the “Hardware Configuration” button. It is the first button in row
two of the LogView’s toolbar.

9.

In the dialog box that appears, select the “Serial COM” node.

10. To the Right of the dialog box, select “Connection at Fixed Baud”.
Configuring and Testing1.

Set the configuration properties and RTS Mode to the following values:
Configuration Properties
Connection: Connection at Fixed Baud
Baud Rate: 115000
Data Bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop Bits: 1
RTS Mode: Input Buffer Full

2.

Click <OK>.

3.

Click the <DOWNLOAD> button to transmit the configuration to the LogBook.

4.

Click the <DETACH> button.

5.

Turn LogBook’s power OFF. This is required to initialize the changes.
Failure to complete step 4 (Detach) and step 5 (Power OFF) will result in a
failure to initialize configuration changes.

6.

Turn the LogBook ON.

7.

Open the DEVICE pull-down menu.

8.

Click on the SELECT LOGBOOK option.

9.

Select “LogBook HopNet.”

Note: The Baud Rate is “115000.” It should match the baud rate set in step 1.
10. Make sure that the two HopNet Modems are relatively close to each other. Later you can relocate
them. Refer to the HopNet 10 Series Wireless Modems User’s Manual in regard to allowable ranges.

A-6 Supplement / HopNet Modems

887997

LogBook User’s Manual, Appendix A

11. OPTION – Remove the Parallel Port cable that connects the LogBook to the PC. At this point theParallel Port cable is no longer needed and can be remove.
12. Click <ATTACH>.
Reference Note:
If this procedure was not successful, refer to the Frequently Asked Questions section on pageA-9 of this appendix.

Setting HopNet Modems for Base and Remote Operations
This section describes a set of serial commands that can be used to configure the HopNet modems. An
application, WinCOM24, will be used for entering commands. The commands will be used to set one
HopNet Modem as the Base (or Local) unit, and the other as the Remote unit.
Reference Note:
This section only provides a brief description of commands used, for additional informationrefer to the HopNet 10 Series Wireless Modems User’s Manual.

Getting Started with WinCOM 24
1.

Install the “WinCOM 24” software included with the HopNet modems.

2.

Attach the 9-pin cable to 9-pin cable (CA-212) from the PC’s COMM1 port to the HopNet modem.

3.

Turn on the HopNet modem, then execute the “WinCOM 24” software.

4.

In the Com Port Selection dialog box, select Com Port 1. (See following figure).

5.

Click <OK>.

ComPort Selection Dialog Box, Selecting Com Port 1
The default Baud Rate of 9600 will be seen (following figure).
The HopNet modem must be properly connected to the computer, and must be havethe same Baud Rate setting (9600). If the Baud Rate setting is other than 9600, use thepull-down list and re-set the rate to 9600.

LogBook User’s Manual, Appendix A

887997

Supplement / HopNet Modems

A-7

Prompt (>)

9600 (Baud Rate)
Use the pull-down list to re-set therate if it is other than 9600.

Showing Default Baud Rate of 9600 and Prompt (>)
6.

Press the <F3> key. A prompt (>) will appear in the upper left corner of the screen, as indicated in
the previous figure.
Commands can now be entered to set one HopNet Modem for Base (Local) operation and the otherfor Remote operation. Command entry is discussed in the following two sections, Setting a HopNet
Modem for Base Operation and Setting a HopNet Modem for Remote Operation.

Setting a Modem for Base Operation
HopNet Modems have a factory default setting for being “Remote” units. You will need to enter thefollowing commands to set the Modem for Base (Local) operation. In order to enter these commands,
successful completion of steps listed in the previous section, Getting Started with WinCOM24, is required.
To ensure that a modem is set for “Base” operation, enter the commands and reset the baud rate in thisorder:
1. Type: sp00 press <Enter> This sets the protocol mode to “point-to-point” transparent mode.
2. Type: wb1 press <Enter> This sets the modem unit for “Base” (Local) operation.
3. Type: zb0 press <Enter> Disables the Banner Display.
4. Type: m> press <Enter> This is the “Save” command.
5. Type: sd01 press <Enter> Sets the Baud Rate to 115200.
6. In the Baud Rate Box (lower right of screen), change the baud rate to 115200, as indicated in thefollowing figure.
7. Type: m> press <Enter> This is the “Save” command.

Command Entries> sp00
00
> wb1
1
> zb0
0
> m>
> sd01> m>>1

Configuration Mode
1 = “Base” unit
0 = “Remote” unit (default)

Baud Rate
Set for 115200

WinCom24, Setting a Modem for “Base” Operation
A-8 Supplement / HopNet Modems

887997

LogBook User’s Manual, Appendix A

Setting a Modem for Remote Operation
HopNet Modems have a factory default setting for being “Remote” units. You can ensure that the unit isset for “Remote” by entering the following commands. In order to enter these commands, successful
completion of steps listed in the section, Getting Started with WinCOM24, is required.
To ensure that a modem is set for “Remote” operation, enter the commands and reset the baud rate in thisorder :
1. Type: sp00 press <Enter> This sets the protocol mode to “point-to-point” transparent mode.
2. Type: wb0 press <Enter> This sets the modem unit for “Remote” operation. This is the default setting.
3. Type: zb0 press <Enter> Disables the Banner Display.
4. Type: m> press <Enter> This is the “Save” command.
5. Type: sd01 press <Enter> Sets the Baud Rate to 115200.
6. In the Baud Rate Box (lower right of screen), change the baud rate to 115200,
as indicated in the previous figure.
7. Type: m> press <Enter> This is the “Save” command.

Frequently Asked Questions
Q: I’ve tried to attach the Logbook after configuring the Serial Port Fixed Baud Rate Setup for the device:
LogBook Serial Fixed. It did not connect. What should I do?
A: Try the following:(a) Turn OFF the LogBook, then restart it to initialize the configuration.
(b) Verify that the proper RS232 cable is connected.
(c) Verify that the configuration in the LogBook Control Panel Applet matches that of theconfiguration downloaded to the LogBook.
(d) Verify that the Serial Ports (on both the LogBook and on the PC) work.
Q: I’ve tried to attach the Logbook after configuring the Serial Port Fixed Baud Rate Setup for the device:
LogBook HopNet. It did not connect. What should I do?
A: Try the following:(a) Turn OFF the LogBook, then restart it to initialize the configuration.
(b) Verify that the proper 9-pin cable is connected to the LogBook from the HopNet Modem.
(c) Verify that the proper 9-pin cable is connected to the PC from the HopNet Modem.
(d) Verify that the HopNet Modem is connected to the intended hardware, e.g. LogBook/PC,
remote/receiver.
(e) Verify that the configuration in the LogBook Control Panel Applet matches that of theconfiguration downloaded to the LogBook.
(f) Verify that the Serial Ports (on both the LogBook and on the PC) work.

LogBook User’s Manual, Appendix A

887997

Supplement / HopNet Modems

A-9

A-10 Supplement / HopNet Modems

887997

LogBook User’s Manual, Appendix A

Error Codes
Software Errors
These errors can appear in the LogBook Monitor window of LogView.
0 No Error
Command Error Definitions
100 Command Error
101 Invalid Character
102 Syntax Error
103 Invalid Separator
104 Data Type Error
105 GET Not Allowed
108 Parameter Not Allowed
109 Missing Parameter
110 Command Header Error
111 Header Separator Error
112 Program Mnemonic Too Long
113 Undefined Header
114 Header Suffix Out Of Range
120 Numeric Data Error
121 Invalid Character In Number
122 Mantissa Too Large
Not Defined In SCPI
123 Exponent Too Large
124 Too Many Digits
128 Numeric Data Not Allowed
130 Suffix Error
131 Invalid Suffix
134 Suffix Too Long
138 Suffix Not Allowed
140 Character Data Error
141 Invalid Character Data
144 Character Data Too Long
148 Character Data Not Allowed
150 String Data Error
151 Invalid String Data
154 String Data Too Long
158 String Data Not Allowed
160 Block Data Error
161 Invalid Block Data
168 Block Data Not Allowed
170 Expression Command Error
171 Invalid Expression
178 Expression Data Not Allowed
180 Macro Definition Error
183 Invalid Inside Macro Definition
184 Macro Parameter Command Error
Execution Error Definitions
200 Execution Error
201 Invalid While In Local
202 Settings Lost Due To RTL
203 Command Protected
210 Trig Error
211 Trig Ignored
212 Arm Ignored
213 Init Ignored
214 Trig Deadlock
215 Arm Deadlock
220 Parameter Error
221 Settings Conflict
222 Data Out Of Range
223 Too Much Data
224 Illegal Parameter Value
225 Operation Out Of Memory
230 Lists Not Same Length
231 Data Corrupt Or Stale
232 Data Questionable
233 Invalid Format

LogBook User’s Manual, 918200

240 Invalid Version
241 Hardware Error
250 Hardware Missing
251 Mass Storage Error
252 Missing Media
253 Corrupt Media
254 Media Full
255 Directory Full
256 File Name Not Found257 File Name Error
258 Media Protected
260 Expression Error
261 MathError In Expression
270 Macro Error
271 Macro Syntax Error
272 Macro Execution Error
273 Illegal Macro Label
274 Macro Parameter Error
275 Macro Definition Too Long
276 Macro Recursion Error
277 Macro Redefinition Not Allowed
278 Macro Header Not Found280 Program Error
281 Cannot Create Program
282 Illegal Program Name
283 Illegal Variable Name
284 Program Currently Running
285 Program Syntax Error
286 Program Runtime Error
290 Memory Use Error
291 Out Of Memory
292 Referenced Name Does Not Exist
293 Referenced Name Already Exists
294 Incompatible Type
Device-Specific Error Definitions
300 Device Specific Error
310 System Error
311 Memory Error
312 PUD Memory Lost
313 Calibration Memory Lost
314 Save Recall Memory Lost
315 Configuration Memory Lost
320 Storage Fault
321 Device Out Of Memory
330 Self Test Failed
340 Calibration Failed
350 Queue Overflow
360 Communication Error
361 Parity Error In Program Message
362 Framing Error In Program Message
363 Input Buffer Overrun
Query Error Definitions
400 Query Error
410 Query Interrupted
420 Query Unterminated430 Query Deadlocked
440 Query Unterm After Indef Response
Power On Event Definitions
500 Lbk Event Power On
600 Lbk Event User Request
700 Lbk Event Request Control
800 Lbk Event Operation Complete
900 Outputs Deteriorating
905 Losing Trigger Events
906 Losing Stop Events

Error Codes

ec-1

Hardware Errors
The following is a list of fatal hardware errors. LogBook’s ERROR LED indicator (on the front panel)
will blink on/off the number of times indicated by the flash code. If the LogBook is attached to an LBK1,
the corresponding control terminal message will be displayed (otherwise, you must count the LED flashes
to determine the error). Note that flash codes 08, 09, and 17 are associated with multiple errors and thus
require an LBK1 to determine which error applies.
ERROR LED
Flash CodeControl Terminal Message

1

NS486 Chip Revision Changed Error

2

Watchdog Timeout Error

3

Flash Startup Code Checksum Error

4

Flash FPGA Code Checksum Error

5

DRAM initialization not complete Error

6

DRAM Sizing Error

7

1 MB DRAM SIMM - Insufficient Memory

8

DRAM Address Line Error

8

DRAM Data Line Error

8

DRAM Integrity Test Error

9

SRAM Address Line Error

9

SRAM Data Line Error

9

SRAM Integrity Test Error

10

SRAM Low Battery Error

11

FPGA Load Error

12

Real Time Clock Low Battery Error

13

DRAM Parity Error

14

Analog Output Slot Empty

15

Calibration Table Verification Error

16

ADC Self Calibration Error

17

TRAP: Divide by Zero, or Divide Overflow

17

TRAP: Debug Trap; Hardware Breakpoint

17

TRAP: Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI)

17

TRAP: Software Breakpoint

17

TRAP: INT0 Instruct.: Overflow Detected

17

TRAP: BOUND instruction: Range Exceeded

17

TRAP: Invalid Opcode17

TRAP: Coprocessor Not Available

17

TRAP: Double Fault

17

TRAP: Coprocessor Segment Overrun

17

TRAP: Invalid Task State Segment

17

TRAP: Segment Not Present

17

TRAP: Stack Exception

17

TRAP: General Protection Fault

18

Printf Floating Point Error

19

FPGA PC-Card File Checksum Error

20

FPGA PC-Card File Load Error
DRAM = Dynamic Random Access Memory (the 4- or 16-MB SIMM board)
SRAM = Static Random Access Memory

ec-2

Error Codes

LogBook User’s ManualDimensional Drawings
Chassis for Primary Data Acquisition Devices and Optional Modules
Note: With exception of the 11” x 8.5” x 2.63” category, either one [of two] dimensional drawings could apply to your device, depending on
the unit’s assembly date. Legacy chassis have notable grooves on the left and right sides of the enclosure. The modern chassis
have smooth surfaces. Refer to the associated drawing, modern or legacy, as applicable.

11” x 8.5” x 1.40” Category …… page DD-2
Two drawings provided: Modern Chassis and Legacy Chassis.

DaqBook/100, /120, /112, /200, /216; DBK1, DBK10, DBK23, DBK24, DBK30A, DBK43A,
DBK50, DBK51, DBK52, DBK53, DBK54, DBK84, DBK203, DBK204, TempBook/66;
WaveBook/512, WaveBook/512H; WBK10, WBK10H, WBK10A, WBK14, WBK15, WBK16,WBK1711” x 8.5” x 1.72” Category …… page DD-4
Two drawings provided: Modern Chassis and Legacy Chassis.

DBK34A, DBK70; LogBook/300; WaveBook/512A, WaveBook/516, WaveBook/516A,
DaqBook/2000A

11” x 8.5” x 2.63” Category …… page DD-6
One drawing provided.

DaqBook/2000E, DaqBook/2000X, WBK40, WBK41, WaveBook/516E

11” x 14” x 3.44” Category …… page DD-7
Two drawings provided: Modern Chassis and Legacy Chassis.

DaqBook/260, DBK60, LogBook/360

Dimensions for DBK Cards and Boards (excludes DBK46 and DBK200 Series) …… page DD-9
3.26” x 8.32” Category
DBK2, DBK4, DBK5, DBK7, DBK8, DBK9, DBK11A, DBK12, DBK13, DBK15, DBK16,
DBK17, DBK18, DBK19, DBK20, DBK21, DBK25, DBK32A, DBK33, DBK44, DBK45,
DBK81, DBK82, DBK83

Dimensions for DBK200 Series Devices …… page DD-10
DBK200
DBK201
DBK202
DBK203 Module (See 11” x 8.5” x 1.40” Category)
DBK204 Module (See 11” x 8.5” x 1.40” Category)
DBK205
DBK206
DBK207
DBK207/CJC
DBK208
DBK209Dimensions for Miscellaneous Components …… page DD-17
DIN-1 (DIN rail mounting kit for DBK206, /207, /207CJC, /208, /209) …… page DD-17
DIN-2 (DIN rail mounting for DBK209) …… page DD-18
POD-1 (for use with DBK83) …… page DD-19
TB-100 Terminal Connector Option (68-pin SCSI III, Screw-Terminal Board) …. Page DD-20
WBK61, WBK62 High Voltage Adapters …… page DD-21
Dimensional Drawings

878394DD-1

Chassis for Primary Devices and Modules
11” x 8.5” x 1.40” Category, Modern Chassis

TOP VIEWREAR VIEW

LEFT SIDE
VIEW

FRONT VIEW

These dimensions apply to the following:
DaqBook/100, /120, /112, /200, /216
DBK1
DBK10
DBK23
DBK24
DBK30ADBK43A
DBK50
DBK51
DBK52
DBK53
DBK54
DBK203
DBK204
TempBook/66
WaveBook/512
WaveBook/512H
WBK10
WBK10HWBK10A
WBK14
WBK15
WBK16
WBK17
WBK25

RIGHT SIDE
VIEW

DD-2

878394

Dimensional Drawings

Chassis for Primary Devices and Modules
11” x 8.5” x 1.40” Category, Legacy Chassis

These dimensions apply to the following:
DaqBook/100, /120, /112, /200, /216
DBK1
DBK10
DBK23
DBK24
DBK30ADBK43A
DBK50
DBK51
DBK52
DBK53
DBK54
DBK203
DBK204
TempBook/66
WaveBook/512
WaveBook/512H
WBK10
WBK10HWBK10A
WBK14
WBK15
WBK16
WBK17

Dimensional Drawings

878394DD-3

Chassis for Primary Devices and Modules
11” x 8.5” x 1.72” Category, Modern Chassis

VENT SIDE
VIEW

These dimensions apply to the following:
DaqBook/2000A
DBK34A
DBK70
LogBook/300
WaveBook/516
WaveBook/512A
WaveBook/516A
WBK18
REAR VIEWTOP VIEWFRONT VIEWFAN SIDE
VIEW

DD-4

878394

Dimensional Drawings

Chassis for Primary Devices and Modules
11” x 8.5” x 1.72” Category, Legacy Chassis

These dimensions apply to the following:
DBK34A
DBK70
LogBook/300
WaveBook/516
WaveBook/512A
WaveBook/516A

Dimensional Drawings

878394

DD-5

Chassis for Primary Devices and Modules
11” x 8.5” x 2.63” Category, Modern Chassis

VENT SIDE
VIEW

These dimensions apply to thefollowing:
DaqBook/2000E
DaqBook/2000X
WaveBook/516E
WBK40
WBK41
REAR VIEWTOP VIEWFRONT VIEWFAN SIDE
VIEW

DD-6

878394

Dimensional Drawings

Chassis for Primary Devices and Modules
11” x 14” x 3.44” Category, Modern Chassis

VENT SIDE
VIEW
TOP VIEWFRONT VIEW

DaqBook/260
DBK60
LogBook/360

REAR VIEW

These dimensions apply to thefollowing:

FAN SIDE
VIEW

Dimensional Drawings

878394

DD-7

Chassis for Primary Devices and Modules
11” x 14” x 3.44” Category, Legacy Chassis

These dimensions apply to thefollowing:
DaqBook/260
DBK60
LogBook/360

DD-8878394

Dimensional Drawings

Dimensions for DBK Cards and Boards (excludes DBK46 and DBK200 Series)
3.26” x 8.32” Board Size Category

These dimensions apply tothe following:
DBK2
DBK4
DBK5
DBK7
DBK8
DBK9
DBK11A
DBK12
DBK13
DBK15
DBK16
DBK17
DBK18
DBK19
DBK20
DBK21
DBK25
DBK32A
DBK33
DBK44
DBK45
DBK80
DBK81
DBK82 (Note 1)
DBK83 (Note 2)

Note 1: DBK82, being significantly thicker than other boards, does not fit into 1-slot enclosures such as the DBK10 andthe DaqBook/216. DBK82 does fit into DBK41 enclosures and in drawer type products such as DaqBoard/260.
Note 2: DBK83 makes use of an external screw-terminal connector designated as POD-1 (see page DD-19).
Dimensional Drawings

878394

DD-9

DBK200 Series Boards

DBK200

DBK201DD-10878394

Dimensional Drawings

DBK202
Note: DBK203 and DBK204 are modules that house a DBK202 board. Refer to the 11” x 8.5” x 1.40” category for applicable dimensions.

Dimensional Drawings

878394

DD-11

DBK205
DBK205DD-12878394

Dimensional Drawings

DBK206

Dimensional Drawings

878394

DD-13

DBK207/CJC
These dimensions apply to the both the DBK207 and the DBK207/CJC.
DD-14

878394

Dimensional Drawings

DBK208

Dimensional Drawings

878394

DD-15

DBK209

DD-16

878394

Dimensional Drawings

Dimensions for Miscellaneous Components

Dimensional Drawings

878394

DIN-1

DD-17

DIN-2DD-18

878394

Dimensional Drawings

POD-1 (for DBK83)

Dimensional Drawings

878394

DD-19

TB-100 Terminal Connector Option
68-pin SCSI III, Screw-Terminal Board

DD-20

878394

Dimensional Drawings

WBK61, WBK62

Dimensional Drawings

High-Voltage Adapters

878394

DD-21

This page is intentionally blank.

DD-22878394

Dimensional Drawings

Glossary
Acquisition
A collection of scans acquired at a specified rate as controlled by the sequencer.
Analog signal
A signal of varying voltage or current, resistance, temperature such as the output of a sensor. Many analog signals
are in the form of sine waves.
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
A circuit or device that converts analog signals into digital values, such as binary bits, for use in digital computer
processing.
BipolarA range of analog signals with positive and negative values (e.g., -5 to +5 V); see unipolar.
BufferBuffer refers to a circuit or device that allows a signal to pass through it, while providing isolation, or anotherfunction, without materially altering the signal. Buffer usually refers to:(a) A device or circuit that allows for the temporary storage of data during data transfers. Such storage cancompensate for differences in data flow rates. In a FIFO (First In - First Out) buffer, the data that is stored
first is also the first data to leave the buffer.
(b) A follower stage used to drive a number of gates without overloading the preceding stage.
(c) An amplifier that accepts high source impedance input and results in low source impedance output(effectively, an impedance buffer).
(d) Buffer Amplifier (see Buffer Amplifier).
Buffer Amplifier
An amplifier used primarily to match two different impedance points, and isolate one stage from a succeeding stage
in order to prevent an undesirable interaction between the two stages. (Also see, Buffer).
ChannelA single input, or output for the acquisition device. In a broader sense, an input channel is a signal path between
the transducer at the point of measurement and the data acquisition system. A channel can go through various
stages (buffers, multiplexers, or signal conditioning amplifiers and filters). Input channels are periodicallysampled for readings.
An output channel from a device can be digital or analog. Outputs can vary in a programmed way in response to an
input channel signal.
Common mode
Common mode pertains to signals that are identical in amplitude and duration; also can be used in reference tosignal components.
Common mode voltage
Common mode voltage refers to a voltage magnitude (referenced to a common point) that is shared by 2 or moresignals. Example: referenced to common, Signal 1 is +5 VDC and Signal 2 is +6 VDC. The common mode
voltage for the two signals is +5.5 VDC [(5 + 6)/2].
CrosstalkAn undesired transfer of signals between system components or channels. Crosstalk often causes signal
interference, more commonly referred to as noise.
Data Logger
A system that efficiently saves relatively large quantities of data to a suitable memory media.

LogBook User’s Manual

887199Glossaryxi

Digital
A digital signal is one of discrete value, in contrast to a varying signal. Digital data is represented by combinationsof binary digits (0s and 1s).
Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC)
A circuit or device that converts digital values (binary bits), into analog signals.
Differential mode
The differential mode measures a voltage between 2 signal lines for a single channel. (Also see single-endedmode).
Differential mode voltage
Differential mode voltage refers to a voltage difference between two signals that are referenced to a common point.
Example: Signal 1 is +5 VDC referenced to common. Signal 2 is: +6 VDC referenced to common.
If the +5 VDC signal is used as the reference, the differential mode voltage is:+1 VDC (+ 6 VDC - +5 VDC = +1VDC).
If the +6 VDC signal is used as the reference, the differential mode voltage is:-1 VDC (+ 5 VDC - +6 VDC = -1 VDC).
DIP Switch
A group of miniature switches in a small Dual In-line Package (DIP). In systems where configuration can not bemade through software alone, DIP switch settings or jumpers are often used to configure the hardware. In manycases a software setting that matches the hardware setting must be made. DIP switches are often used for
addressing.
ESD
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) is the transfer of an electrostatic charge between bodies having different electrostatic
potentials. This transfer occurs during direct contact of the bodies, or when induced by an electrostatic field. ESD
energy can damage an integrated circuit (IC).
Excitation
Some transducers [e.g. strain gages, thermistors, and resistance temperature detectors (RTDs)] require a known
voltage or current input in order for the sensor to operate. This known input is called the Excitation.
Gain
The degree to which a signal is amplified (or attenuated) to allow greater accuracy and resolution; can be
expressed as ×n or ±dB.
Isolation
The arrangement or operation of a circuit so that signals from another circuit or device do not affect the isolated
circuit. Isolation usually refers to a separation of the direct link between the signal source and the analog-to-digitalconverter (ADC). Isolation is necessary when measuring high common-mode voltage.
Linearization
Some transducers produce a voltage in linear proportion to the condition measured. Other transducers (e.g.,thermocouples) have a nonlinear response. To convert nonlinear signals into accurate readings requires software
to calibrate several points in the range used and then interpolate values between these points.
Multiplexer (MUX)
A device that selects a signal from among several signals and outputs it on a single channel.
Sample (reading)
The value of a signal observed on a channel at an instant in time. When triggered, the ADC reads the channel andconverts the sampled value into a digital representation.
Scan
A series of measurements across a pre-selected sequence of channels.
xii

Glossary

887199LogBook User’s ManualSequencer
Defines and controls the state of the measurement system for each step of a scan.
Simultaneous Sample-and-Hold
An operation that captures samples from multiple channels at the same instant in time. The result is eliminationof time skew between measurement of individual channels.
Single-ended mode
Measurement of a voltage between a signal line and some reference that may be shared with other channels.
(Also see differential mode).
Trigger
An event to start a scan or mark an instant during an acquisition. A trigger can be a TTL signal, a specified
signal level, a button manually or mechanically engaged, or a software command.
TTL
Transistor-Transistor Logic (TTL) typically used to communicate logic signals where a logical 0 is defined by a
voltage level of <0.8V and logical 1 is defined as 2.4-5V.
Unipolar
A range of analog signals between zero and some positive value (e.g., 0 to 10 V).

LogBook User’s Manual

887199Glossaryxiii

This page is intentionally blank.

xiv

Glossary

887199LogBook User’s Manual